Nixon Camcorder D3s User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
User's Manual  
En  
Where to Find It  
Find what you’re looking for from:  
0x–xvii  
The Table of Contents  
Find items by function or menu name.  
i
iv–ix  
The Q&A Index  
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find  
it from the “question and answer” index.  
0
i
19–20  
The Quick Start Guide  
0
i
A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right  
away.  
425–430  
The Index  
Search by key word.  
0
i
i
403–407  
Error Messages  
0
If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder, monitor, or control panel,  
find the solution here.  
398–402  
Troubleshooting  
0
i
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.  
A For Your Safety  
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety  
instructions in “For Your Safety” (0xviii–xx).  
Help  
Use the camera’s on-board help feature for help on menu items and other  
topics. See page 25 for details.  
Digitutor  
Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available  
from the following website:  
http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html  
Package Contents  
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.  
Memory cards are sold separately.  
• D3S digital camera  
(0 3)  
• BF-1B body cap  
(0 31, 375)  
• BS-2 accessory shoe  
cover (0 18, 186)  
• EN-EL4a rechargeable  
Li-ion battery with  
terminal cover  
• MH-22 quick charger  
with power cable  
and two contact  
protectors  
• AN-DC5 strap  
(0 18)  
(0 26, 28)  
(0 26, 417)  
• EG-D2 audio/video  
cable (0 269)  
• UC-E4 USB cable  
(0 254, 259)  
• USB cable clip  
(0 255)  
• Warranty  
• Software Suite CD-ROM  
User’s Manual (this guide)  
• Quick Guide  
• Registration card  
(U. S. A. only)  
• Software Installation Guide  
i
Symbols and Conventions  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following  
symbols and conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before  
use to prevent damage to the camera.  
D
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before  
using the camera.  
A
This icon marks references to other pages in this manual.  
0
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor  
are shown in bold  
.
A Trademark Information  
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple  
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and  
Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI  
logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. PictBridge is a trademark.  
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other  
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
ii  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
iv  
x
Q&A Index  
Table of Contents  
1
Introduction  
X
s
x
y
d
N
k
S
Z
r
J
l
t
I
e
Q
U
n
21  
53  
65  
77  
89  
Tutorial  
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
Image Recording Options  
Focus  
0 101  
0 109  
0 115  
0 149  
0 169  
0 185  
0 199  
0 221  
0 245  
0 253  
0 273  
0 365  
Release Mode  
ISO Sensitivity  
Exposure  
White Balance  
Image Enhancement  
Flash Photography  
Other Shooting Options  
More About Playback  
Voice Memos  
Connections  
Menu Guide  
Technical Notes  
iii  
Q&A Index  
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer”  
index.  
New Features  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I take pictures in 35mm format?  
Image area  
78  
How do I take high-quality NEF (RAW)  
photos?  
14-bit NEF (RAW)  
85  
Can I use the monitor as a viewfinder?  
How do I shoot movies?  
Live view  
Movies  
53  
65  
High-sensitivity movie  
mode  
Can I shoot movies under low light?  
72  
How do I record photographs using two  
memory cards?  
Slot 2  
88  
Can I control how photos are processed?  
How do I preserve details in shadows  
and highlights?  
Picture Controls  
Active D-Lighting  
170  
181  
How do I focus on erratically moving  
subjects?  
How do I tell if the camera is level?  
Can I adjust focus separately for  
different lenses?  
3D-tracking  
Virtual horizon  
AF fine tune  
297  
338  
339  
Cleaning the low-pass  
filter  
How do I remove dust from the low-pass  
filter protecting the image sensor?  
378  
Camera Setup  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I keep the monitor from turning  
off?  
Monitor off delay  
306  
45,  
305  
How do I keep the shutter speed and  
aperture displays from turning off?  
Auto meter off  
iv  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I set the clock?  
How do I set the clock for daylight  
savings time?  
How do I change time zones when I  
travel?  
34,  
330  
Time zone and date  
How do I adjust monitor brightness for  
menus or playback?  
Can I reverse the exposure indicator?  
Can I display the menus in a different  
language?  
LCD brightness  
Reverse indicators  
Language  
326  
324  
33,  
331  
Can I save menu settings for use on a  
different D3S camera?  
How do I restore default settings?  
How do I restore shooting menu  
defaults?  
Save/load settings  
Two-button reset  
336  
200  
287  
Reset shooting menu  
How do I restore Custom Setting  
defaults?  
Reset custom settings  
294  
Menus and Displays  
Question  
Key phrase  
Help  
0
25  
22  
How do I get more information on a  
menu?  
How do I use the menus?  
Can I get quick access to frequently-used  
settings?  
Can I get quick access to recently-used  
settings?  
Using the menus  
My Menu  
359  
363  
403  
43  
Recent settings  
Error messages and  
displays  
What does this warning mean?  
How much charge does the battery have  
left?  
Battery level  
v
Question  
Key phrase  
0
How do I get more information about  
the battery?  
Battery info  
333  
How do I keep the file number from  
being reset when I insert a new memory  
card?  
File number sequence 308  
How do I reset file numbering to 1?  
How do I clean the camera or lens?  
Cleaning the camera  
377  
Taking Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
Number of exposures  
remaining  
0
How many more shots can I take with  
this card?  
44  
How do I take bigger photographs?  
How can I get more photos on the  
memory card?  
Image quality and size 83, 86  
How do I focus the viewfinder?  
Can I control how the camera focuses?  
Can I choose the focus point?  
Viewfinder focus  
Autofocus  
Focus point  
41  
89  
94  
How do I take a lot of photographs  
quickly?  
Release mode  
Shooting speed  
ISO sensitivity  
102  
104,  
307  
Can I change the frame advance rate?  
Can I take pictures under low light  
without the flash?  
Can the ISO sensitivity I choose be  
adjusted to ensure optimal exposure?  
110  
112  
ISO sensitivity auto  
control  
Can I make photos brighter or darker?  
How do I make a time exposure?  
Exposure compensation 134  
Long time-exposures 128  
vi  
Question  
Key phrase  
Exposure and flash  
bracketing  
White balance  
bracketing  
0
136,  
312  
141,  
312  
145,  
312  
149  
Can I vary exposure or flash level  
automatically over a series of photos?  
Can I create multiple copies of a photo  
using different white balance settings?  
Can I vary Active D-Lighting  
automatically over a series of photos?  
How do I adjust white balance?  
How do I change settings for optional  
flash units?  
How can I record multiple shots as a  
single photograph?  
Can I record voice memo when taking a  
photograph?  
ADL bracketing  
White balance  
Flash mode  
193  
202  
246  
Multiple exposure  
Voice memo  
Fine tune optimal  
exposure  
Exposure delay mode  
Can I pick the standard exposure level?  
304  
310  
How can I reduce blur?  
How do I select movie frame size,  
microphone sensitivity, high-sensitivity  
movie mode, and card slot options?  
Movie settings  
70  
Viewing Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
Camera playback  
Viewing movies  
Photo info  
0
222  
73  
Can I view my photographs on the  
camera?  
Can I view movies on the camera?  
Can I view more information about  
photos?  
225  
227,  
277  
Why do parts of my photos blink?  
Photo info, highlights  
vii  
Question  
Key phrase  
Deleting individual  
photos  
0
How do I get rid of an unwanted photo?  
240  
Can I delete several photos at once?  
Can I zoom in on pictures?  
Delete  
Playback zoom  
242  
237  
Can I protect photos from accidental  
deletion?  
Protect  
238  
Can I hide selected photos?  
How do I tell if parts of my photos may  
be overexposed?  
Hide image  
Display mode:  
highlights  
275  
227,  
277  
226,  
277  
281  
249  
Display mode: focus  
point  
How do I tell where the camera focused?  
Can I view photos as they are taken?  
Can I record voice memos with photos?  
Image review  
Voice memo  
Is there an automatic playback (“slide  
show”) option?  
Slide show  
282  
Retouching Photographs  
Question  
Key phrase  
D-Lighting  
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
0
How do I bring out details in shadows?  
Can I get rid of red eye?  
Can I crop photographs on the camera?  
344  
345  
346  
Can I create a monochrome copy of a  
photograph?  
Monochrome  
347  
348  
Filter effects,  
Color balance  
Can I create a copy with different colors?  
Can I use the camera to create JPEG  
copies of NEF (RAW) photographs?  
NEF (RAW) processing 353  
Can I overlay two NEF (RAW) photos to  
make a single image?  
Can I trim movies or save movie stills?  
Image overlay  
Editing movies  
349  
74  
viii  
Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices  
Question  
Key phrase  
0
Can I view my photos on TV?  
Can I view my photos in High Definition?  
Television playback  
HDMI  
269  
271  
Connecting to a  
computer  
How do I copy photos to my computer?  
254  
How do I print photographs?  
Can I print photos without a computer?  
Can I print the date on my photographs?  
Printing photographs  
Printing via USB  
Time stamp  
258  
259  
261  
Optional Accessories  
Question  
Key phrase  
Approved memory  
cards  
0
What memory cards can I use?  
What lenses can I use?  
What optional flash units (Speedlights)  
can I use?  
What software is available for my  
camera?  
What AC adapters, remote cords, and  
viewfinder accessories are available for  
my camera?  
419  
366  
187  
Compatible lenses  
Optional flash units  
Other accessories  
375  
372  
Other accessories  
ix  
Table of Contents  
Q&A Index ................................................................................................iv  
For Your Safety .................................................................................. xviii  
Notices.....................................................................................................xxi  
Introduction  
1
Overview....................................................................................................2  
Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................3  
Camera Body.......................................................................................3  
The Top Control Panel .....................................................................8  
The Rear Control Panel..................................................................10  
The Viewfinder Display..................................................................12  
The Information Display................................................................14  
The Camera Strap............................................................................18  
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover .................................................18  
Quick Start Guide................................................................................. 19  
Tutorial  
21  
Camera Menus...................................................................................... 22  
Using Camera Menus .....................................................................23  
Help ......................................................................................................25  
First Steps ............................................................................................... 26  
Charge the Battery..........................................................................26  
Insert the Battery .............................................................................28  
Attach a Lens.....................................................................................31  
Basic Setup.........................................................................................33  
Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................36  
Format the Memory Card .............................................................39  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...............................................................41  
Basic Photography and Playback................................................... 43  
Turn the Camera On .......................................................................43  
Adjust Camera Settings.................................................................46  
x
Focus and Shoot.............................................................................. 49  
Viewing Photographs.................................................................... 51  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs............................................. 52  
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)  
53  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor.......................................... 54  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
65  
Recording Movies................................................................................ 66  
Viewing Movies.................................................................................... 73  
Editing Movies...................................................................................... 74  
Image Recording Options  
77  
Image Area............................................................................................. 78  
Image Quality........................................................................................ 83  
Image Size.............................................................................................. 86  
Slot 2 ........................................................................................................ 88  
Focus  
89  
Focus Mode ........................................................................................... 90  
AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 92  
Focus Point Selection......................................................................... 94  
Focus Lock.............................................................................................. 96  
Manual Focus........................................................................................ 99  
Release Mode  
101  
Choosing a Release Mode ..............................................................102  
Continuous Mode..............................................................................104  
Self-Timer Mode.................................................................................106  
Mirror up Mode ..................................................................................108  
xi  
ISO Sensitivity  
109  
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually..............................................110  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ..........................................................112  
Exposure  
115  
Metering ...............................................................................................116  
Exposure Mode...................................................................................118  
e: Programmed Auto .................................................................. 120  
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .............................................................. 122  
g: Aperture-Priority Auto ........................................................... 123  
h: Manual......................................................................................... 125  
Long Time-Exposures.......................................................................128  
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock...............................................130  
Autoexposure (AE) Lock..................................................................132  
Exposure Compensation.................................................................134  
Bracketing ............................................................................................136  
White Balance  
149  
White Balance Options ....................................................................150  
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................153  
Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................157  
Preset Manual .....................................................................................158  
Image Enhancement  
169  
Picture Controls..................................................................................170  
Selecting a Picture Control........................................................ 170  
Modifying Existing Picture Controls ...................................... 172  
Creating Custom Picture Controls.......................................... 176  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls ........................................... 179  
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................181  
Color Space..........................................................................................183  
xii  
Flash Photography  
185  
Using a Flash .......................................................................................186  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ..........................187  
Other Flash Units...........................................................................189  
i-TTL Flash Control ............................................................................192  
Flash Modes.........................................................................................193  
FV Lock ..................................................................................................196  
Other Shooting Options  
199  
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................200  
Multiple Exposure .............................................................................202  
Interval Timer Photography ..........................................................208  
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................214  
Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................217  
More About Playback  
221  
Full-Frame Playback .........................................................................222  
Photo Information.............................................................................225  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback .....................235  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................237  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................238  
Deleting Photographs .....................................................................240  
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback .....................................240  
The Playback Menu ......................................................................242  
Voice Memos  
245  
Recording Voice Memos.................................................................246  
Playing Voice Memos.......................................................................251  
xiii  
Connections  
253  
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................254  
Direct USB Connection............................................................... 255  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks............................................. 257  
Printing Photographs.......................................................................258  
Connecting the Printer............................................................... 259  
Printing Pictures One at a Time............................................... 260  
Printing Multiple Pictures.......................................................... 263  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set ................................. 267  
Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................269  
Standard Definition Devices..................................................... 269  
High-Definition Devices............................................................. 271  
Menu Guide  
273  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...............................274  
Playback Folder......................................................................... 275  
Hide Image................................................................................. 275  
Display Mode............................................................................. 277  
Copy Image(s) ........................................................................... 278  
Image Review............................................................................ 281  
After Delete................................................................................ 281  
Rotate Tall................................................................................... 282  
Slide Show.................................................................................. 282  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options...............................284  
Shooting Menu Bank .............................................................. 285  
Reset Shooting Menu............................................................. 287  
Extended Menu Banks............................................................ 287  
Active Folder.............................................................................. 288  
File Naming................................................................................ 290  
Vignette Control....................................................................... 290  
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction).......... 291  
High ISO NR................................................................................ 291  
xiv  
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ..............292  
B: Custom Setting Bank ........................................................294  
A: Reset Custom Settings .....................................................294  
a: Autofocus ....................................................................................295  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection.....................................................295  
a2: AF-S Priority Selection .....................................................296  
a3: Dynamic AF Area ...............................................................296  
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On........................................298  
a5: AF Activation.......................................................................298  
a6: Focus point Illumination.................................................299  
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around..............................................299  
a8: AF Point Selection .............................................................300  
a9: AF-ON Button......................................................................300  
a10: Vertical AF-ON Button ...................................................301  
b: Metering/Exposure..................................................................302  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value ..............................................302  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl. ..........................................302  
b3: EV Steps for Exposure Comp.........................................302  
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation ......................................303  
b5: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................304  
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure.........................................304  
c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................305  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .........................................305  
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay........................................................305  
c3: Self-Timer..............................................................................305  
c4: Monitor off Delay...............................................................306  
d: Shooting/Display......................................................................306  
d1: Beep .......................................................................................306  
d2: Shooting Speed .................................................................307  
d3: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................307  
d4: File Number Sequence....................................................308  
d5: Control Panel/Viewfinder...............................................309  
d6: Information Display..........................................................309  
d7: Screen Tips...........................................................................310  
d8: LCD Illumination................................................................310  
d9: Exposure Delay Mode......................................................310  
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................311  
e1: Flash Sync Speed...............................................................311  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................312  
xv  
e3: Modeling Flash................................................................... 312  
e4: Auto Bracketing Set ......................................................... 312  
e5: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)............................................. 313  
e6: Bracketing Order ............................................................... 313  
f: Controls ........................................................................................ 314  
f1: Multi Selector Center Button ......................................... 314  
f2: Multi Selector....................................................................... 315  
f3: Photo Info/Playback.......................................................... 315  
f4: Assign Fn Button................................................................ 316  
f5: Assign Preview Button ..................................................... 321  
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button ................................................. 321  
f7: Assign BKT Button.............................................................. 322  
f8: Customize Command Dials............................................ 322  
f9: Release Button to Use Dial.............................................. 324  
f10: No Memory Card?............................................................ 324  
f11: Reverse Indicators ........................................................... 324  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................325  
Format Memory Card ............................................................. 326  
LCD Brightness.......................................................................... 326  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo ..................................................... 327  
Video Mode................................................................................ 329  
HDMI............................................................................................. 329  
Flicker Reduction...................................................................... 330  
Time Zone and Date ............................................................... 330  
Language.................................................................................... 331  
Image Comment ...................................................................... 331  
Auto Image Rotation .............................................................. 332  
Battery Info................................................................................. 333  
Image Authentication ............................................................ 334  
Copyright Information ........................................................... 335  
Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 336  
Virtual Horizon .......................................................................... 338  
AF Fine Tune.............................................................................. 339  
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 340  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............341  
D-Lighting................................................................................... 344  
Red-Eye Correction.................................................................. 345  
Trim............................................................................................... 346  
xvi  
Monochrome .............................................................................347  
Filter Effects................................................................................348  
Color Balance.............................................................................348  
Image Overlay............................................................................349  
NEF (RAW) Processing.............................................................353  
Resize............................................................................................355  
Side-by-Side Comparison......................................................357  
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu......................................359  
Technical Notes  
365  
Compatible Lenses ...........................................................................366  
Other Accessories..............................................................................372  
Caring for the Camera......................................................................377  
Storage..............................................................................................377  
Cleaning ...........................................................................................377  
The Low-Pass Filter.......................................................................378  
“Clean Now” ...............................................................................378  
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown” ..............................................379  
Manual Cleaning.......................................................................381  
Replacing the Focusing Screen................................................384  
Replacing the Clock Battery......................................................386  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................388  
Defaults.................................................................................................392  
Exposure Program.............................................................................397  
Troubleshooting ................................................................................398  
Error Messages ...................................................................................403  
Specifications......................................................................................408  
Calibrating Batteries ....................................................................417  
Approved Memory Cards ...............................................................419  
Memory Card Capacity....................................................................420  
Battery Life...........................................................................................423  
Index.......................................................................................................425  
xvii  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to  
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using  
this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use  
the product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the  
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all  
warnings before using this Nikon product.  
A
WARNINGS  
A Keep the sun out of the frame  
Keep the sun well out of the frame  
when shooting backlit subjects.  
Sunlight focused into the camera  
when the sun is in or close to the  
frame could cause a fire.  
A Turn off immediately in the event of  
malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an  
unusual smell coming from the  
equipment or AC adapter  
(available separately), unplug the  
AC adapter and remove the  
battery immediately, taking care  
to avoid burns. Continued  
operation could result in injury.  
After removing the battery, take  
the equipment to a Nikon-  
authorized service center for  
inspection.  
A Do not look at the sun through the  
viewfinder  
Viewing the sun or other strong  
light source through the  
viewfinder could cause  
permanent visual impairment.  
A Using the viewfinder diopter control  
When operating the viewfinder  
diopter control with your eye to  
the viewfinder, care should be  
taken not to put your finger in  
your eye accidentally.  
A Do not disassemble  
Touching the product’s internal  
parts could result in injury. In the  
event of malfunction, the product  
should be repaired only by a  
qualified technician. Should the  
product break open as the result  
of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter  
and then take the product to a  
Nikon-authorized service center  
for inspection.  
xviii  
A Do not use in the presence of flammable  
gas  
• Do not immerse in or expose to  
water.  
Do not use electronic equipment  
in the presence of flammable gas,  
as this could result in explosion or  
fire.  
• Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with  
metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
• Batteries are prone to leakage  
when fully discharged. To avoid  
damage to the product, be sure to  
remove the battery when no  
charge remains.  
A Keep out of reach of children  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in injury.  
A Do not place the strap around the neck of  
an infant or child  
Placing the camera strap around  
the neck of an infant or child  
could result in strangulation.  
• When the battery is not in use,  
attach the terminal cover and  
store in a cool, dry place.  
• The battery may be hot  
A Observe proper precautions when  
handling batteries  
immediately after use or when the  
product has been used on battery  
power for an extended period.  
Before removing the battery turn  
the camera off and allow the  
battery to cool.  
• Discontinue use immediately  
should you notice any changes in  
the battery, such as discoloration  
or deformation.  
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when  
handling batteries for use in this  
product:  
• Use only batteries approved for  
use in this equipment.  
• Use only CR1616 lithium batteries  
to replace the clock battery. Using  
another type of battery could  
cause an explosion. Dispose of  
used batteries as directed.  
• Do not short or disassemble the  
battery.  
• Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are  
using an AC adapter, be sure it is  
unplugged.  
• Do not attempt to insert the  
battery upside down or  
backwards.  
• Do not expose the battery to  
flame or to excessive heat.  
xix  
A Observe proper precautions when  
handling the quick charger  
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in fire or  
electric shock.  
• Dust on or near the metal parts of  
the plug should be removed with  
a dry cloth. Continued use could  
result in fire.  
• Do not handle the power cable or  
go near the charger during  
thunderstorms. Failure to observe  
this precaution could result in  
electric shock.  
A Use appropriate cables  
When connecting cables to the  
input and output jacks, use only  
the cables provided or sold by  
Nikon for the purpose to maintain  
compliance with product  
regulations.  
A CD-ROMs  
CD-ROMs containing software or  
manuals should not be played  
back on audio CD equipment.  
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD  
player could cause hearing loss or  
damage the equipment.  
• Do not damage, modify, or  
forcibly tug or bend the power  
cable. Do not place it under  
heavy objects or expose it to heat  
or flame. Should the insulation be  
damaged and the wires become  
exposed, take the power cable to  
a Nikon-authorized service  
representative for inspection.  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in fire or electric  
shock.  
• Do not handle the plug or charger  
with wet hands. Failure to  
observe this precaution could  
result in electric shock.  
• Do not use with travel converters  
or adapters designed to convert  
from one voltage to another or  
with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure  
to observe this precaution could  
damage the product or cause  
overheating or fire.  
A Observe caution when using the flash  
• Using optional flash units in close  
contact with the skin or other  
objects could cause burns.  
• Using optional flash units close to  
the subject’s eyes could cause  
temporary visual impairment.  
Particular care should be  
observed when photographing  
infants, when the flash should be  
no less than one meter (39 in.)  
from the subject.  
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
Should the monitor break, care  
should be taken to avoid injury  
due to broken glass and to  
prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or  
entering the eyes or mouth.  
xx  
Notices  
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any  
product may be reproduced, transmitted,  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,  
or translated into any language in any  
form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior  
written permission.  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and  
software described in these manuals at  
any time and without prior notice.  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
• While every effort has been made to  
ensure that the information in these  
manuals is accurate and complete, we  
would appreciate it were you to bring  
any errors or omissions to the attention  
of the Nikon representative in your area  
(address provided separately).  
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
D3S  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
The FCC requires the user be notified  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
that any changes or modifications made  
and used in accordance with the  
to this device that are not expressly  
instructions, may cause harmful  
approved by Nikon Corporation may  
interference to radio communications.  
void the user’s authority to operate the  
However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular  
equipment.  
installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television  
reception, which can be determined by  
turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the  
following measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
• Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet  
on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided  
by Nikon for your equipment. Using  
other interface cables may exceed the  
limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product  
may expose you to lead, a chemical known  
to the State of California to cause birth  
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash  
hands after handling.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
xxi  
Notices for Customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est  
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du  
Canada.  
This Class B digital apparatus complies  
with Canadian ICES-003.  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
This symbol indicates that  
this product is to be  
This symbol on the battery  
indicates that the battery is  
to be collected separately.  
collected separately.  
The following apply only to  
users in European countries:  
• This product is designated  
for separate collection at an  
appropriate collection point. Do not  
dispose of as household waste.  
• For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
The following apply only to  
users in European countries:  
• All batteries, whether marked with this  
symbol or not, are designated for  
separate collection at an appropriate  
collection point. Do not dispose of as  
household waste.  
• For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage  
devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can  
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially  
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image  
data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another  
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and  
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for  
example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for  
preset manual. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying  
data storage devices.  
xxii  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or  
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be  
punishable by law.  
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or • Cautions on certain copies and reproductions  
reproduced  
The government has issued cautions  
on copies or reproductions of  
Do not copy or reproduce paper  
money, coins, securities, government  
bonds, or local government bonds,  
even if such copies or reproductions  
are stamped “Sample.”  
securities issued by private companies  
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,  
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon  
tickets, except when a minimum of  
necessary copies are to be provided for  
business use by a company. Also, do  
not copy or reproduce passports  
issued by the government, licenses  
issued by public agencies and private  
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as  
passes and meal coupons.  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is  
prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused  
postage stamps or post cards issued by  
the government is prohibited.  
• Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of  
copyrighted creative works such as  
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,  
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and  
photographs is governed by national  
and international copyright laws. Do  
not use this product for the purpose of  
making illegal copies or to infringe  
copyright laws.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of  
certified documents stipulated by law  
is prohibited.  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex  
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery  
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon  
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to  
operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the  
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party  
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal  
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera  
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized  
Nikon dealer.  
xxiii  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or  
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the  
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for  
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing  
product support and education, continually-updated information is  
available on-line at the following sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,  
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice  
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be  
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following  
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xxiv  
X
Introduction  
X
This chapter covers information you will need to know before  
using the camera, including the names of camera parts.  
Overview..................................................................................... 2  
Getting to Know the Camera .................................................. 3  
Camera Body................................................................................................3  
The Top Control Panel...............................................................................8  
The Rear Control Panel .......................................................................... 10  
The Viewfinder Display.......................................................................... 12  
The Information Display........................................................................ 14  
The Camera Strap .................................................................................... 18  
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover ......................................................... 18  
Quick Start Guide .................................................................... 19  
1
Overview  
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR)  
digital camera. Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly  
to get the most from the camera, and keep them where they will  
be read by all those who use the product.  
X
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with  
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within  
its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON  
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON  
WARRANTY.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon  
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a  
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,  
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees  
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are  
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any  
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional  
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or  
serviced.  
A Camera Settings  
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.  
2
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls  
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and  
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.  
Camera Body  
X
1 D (bracketing)  
button......... 137, 141, 145, 204, 322  
2 Release mode dial  
lock release.................................... 103  
3 Release mode dial........................ 103  
4 Eyelet for camera strap................. 18  
5 M (flash mode) button................. 194  
6 F (command lock)  
11 Shutter-release button ...........49, 50  
12 E (exposure compensation)  
button.............................................134  
13 Eyelet for camera strap................. 18  
14 I (exposure mode)  
button..................120, 122, 123, 125  
Q (format) button........................ 39  
15 Top control panel ..............................8  
button.................................... 130, 131 16 Diopter adjustment control......... 41  
7 Focal plane mark (E)................. 100 17 Accessory shoe  
(for optional flash unit)........ 18, 186  
18 Accessory shoe cover  
8 Metering selector......................... 117  
9 Metering selector  
.......................................... 18, 186, 390  
lock button .................................... 117  
10 Power switch.............................10, 43  
3
Camera Body (Continued)  
X
1 Mirror ..................................... 108, 381 12 Connector for external  
microphone..................................... 71  
13 Audio/video (A/V)  
2 Self-timer lamp............................. 107  
3 Microphone (for movies)........67, 71  
4 Flash sync terminal cover........... 186  
5 Ten-pin remote terminal  
cover....................................... 217, 376  
6 Flash sync terminal...................... 186  
7 Ten-pin remote terminal ... 217, 376  
8 USB connector cover.......... 255, 259  
9 Lens release button ....................... 32  
10 Connector cover.................. 269, 271  
11 USB connector ..................... 255, 259  
connector.......................................269  
14 HDMI mini-pin connector ..........271  
15 DC-IN connector for optional EH-6  
AC adapter .....................................372  
16 Focus-mode selector...............90, 99  
17 Battery-chamber cover latch....... 28  
18 Battery-chamber cover................. 28  
19 Meter coupling lever...................411  
20 Body cap.................................. 31, 375  
4
X
1
Pv (depth-of-field preview)  
6 Vertical shooting shutter-release  
button............................. 67, 119, 321  
button lock ....................................320  
2 Sub-command dial............. 222, 322 7 CPU contacts  
Fn button........................ 82, 197, 316 8 Mounting index.............................. 32  
3
4 Sub-command dial for  
9 Lens mount............................. 32, 100  
vertical shooting .......................... 320  
5 Shutter-release button for  
vertical shooting .......................... 320  
10 Tripod socket  
D The Microphone and Speaker  
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic  
devices. Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data  
recorded on the magnetic devices.  
5
Camera Body (Continued)  
X
1 Viewfinder eyepiece...................... 42 11 Rear control panel................. 10, 309  
2 Eyepiece shutter lever................... 42 12 ISO (ISO sensitivity) button.........110  
Two-button reset button ...........200  
3 O (delete) button .................. 52, 240  
Q (format) button........................ 39 13 QUAL (image quality/size)  
button.........................................84, 86  
14 WB (white balance)  
button...........................151, 156, 157  
Two-button reset button ...........200  
15 Microphone  
4 K (playback) button ........... 51, 222  
5 Monitor..............................51, 53, 222  
6 G (menu) button ............. 22, 273  
7 N (thumbnail/playback  
zoom) button....................... 235, 237  
8 L (protect) button ................... 238  
? (help) button ................................ 25  
9 J (OK) button ................................ 23  
10 R (info) button.............................. 14  
(for voice memos) ........................246  
6
X
1 Viewfinder........................................ 41 9 Card slot cover release button  
(under cover)................................... 36  
Speaker (under cover).......... 73, 251  
10 B (AF-ON) button for  
vertical shooting ..........................301  
11 H (microphone) button.....247, 248  
12 a (live view) button........55, 59, 66  
13 AF-area mode selector.................. 92  
14 Main command dial for  
2 A (AE/AF lock)  
button................................96, 97, 321  
3 B (AF-ON) button....... 56, 67, 91  
4 Main command dial ........... 222, 322  
5 Multi selector .................................. 23  
6 Focus selector lock......................... 94  
7 Memory card access lamp .....38, 50  
8 Memory card slot cover..........36, 38  
vertical shooting ..........................320  
7
The Top Control Panel  
X
Shutter speed .......................... 122, 126  
Exposure compensation value..... 134  
Number of shots in  
exposure and flash bracketing  
sequence ........................................... 137  
Number of shots in  
WB bracketing sequence............... 141  
Number of intervals for  
interval timer photography .......... 211  
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) ..... 216  
ISO sensitivity ................................... 110  
Shutter-speed lock icon................. 130  
Number of exposures remaining ...44  
Number of shots remaining before  
memory buffer fills ..........................105  
Capture mode indicator .................257  
Aperture stop indicator .........124,369  
1
10  
11  
12  
Aperture (f-number)................123, 126  
Aperture (number of stops) ...124, 369  
Bracketing increment.............138, 142  
Number of shots in ADL bracketing  
sequence............................................145  
Number of shots per interval ........211  
Maximum aperture  
(non-CPU lenses)..............................216  
PC mode indicator ...........................257  
Battery indicator.................................43  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Flexible program indicator............ 121  
Exposure mode ................................ 118  
Flash mode........................................ 193  
Shooting menu bank...................... 285  
Custom settings bank..................... 294  
13  
14  
Frame count ........................................44  
Preset white balance  
recording indicator ..........................160  
Manual lens number .......................216  
“K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures)..................44  
Memory card indicator  
(slot 1)............................................. 37, 39  
Memory card indicator  
(slot 2)............................................. 37, 39  
15  
9
8
X
FV lock indicator .............................. 197  
Flash sync indicator......................... 311  
Clock battery indicator.............35, 386  
GPS connection indicator.............. 219  
Focus mode indicator........................90  
Interval timer indicator .................. 211  
Multiple exposure indicator.......... 203  
Exposure and flash  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
27  
28  
bracketing indicator ........................137  
WB bracketing indicator.................141  
ADL bracketing indicator ...............145  
Exposure indicator...........................127  
Exposure compensation  
indicator .............................................134  
Bracketing progress indicator:  
Aperture lock icon........................... 131  
Multiple exposure (series)  
indicator............................................. 204  
Exposure and flash bracketing...137  
WB bracketing................................141  
ADL bracketing ..............................145  
PC connection indicator.................257  
Tilt indicator.......................................318  
Image comment indicator............. 331  
24  
25  
26  
“Beep” indicator............................... 306  
Exposure compensation  
indicator............................................. 134  
9
The Rear Control Panel  
X
A LCD Illuminators  
Rotating the power switch toward  
D
Power switch  
activates the exposure meters and the  
control panel backlights (LCD  
illuminator), allowing the displays to be  
read in the dark. After the power switch  
is released, the illuminators will remain  
lit for six seconds while the exposure  
meters are active or until the shutter is  
released or the power switch is rotated toward  
D
again.  
10  
Image quality (JPEG images)...........84  
“Remaining” indicator.................... 309  
Image size.............................................86  
“K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures)..................44  
Color temperature indicator..........157  
Memory card slot indicators............88  
Image quality ......................................84  
White balance bracketing  
indicator .............................................141  
Voice memo recording  
indicator (shooting mode).............247  
Voice memo status  
indicator ....................................249, 250  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
ISO sensitivity indicator ................. 110  
Auto ISO sensitivity  
indicator............................................. 113  
ISO sensitivity ................................... 110  
ISO sensitivity (high/low gain) ..... 111  
Number of exposures remaining....44  
Length of voice memo ................... 249  
White balance fine-tuning ............ 156  
White balance preset number...... 167  
Color temperature........................... 157  
PC mode indicator........................... 257  
5
9
X
10  
11  
12  
Voice memo recording  
mode...................................................247  
White balance ...................................151  
White balance fine-tuning  
indicator .............................................156  
11  
The Viewfinder Display  
X
1 12-mm reference circle for center-  
weighted metering...................... 116  
2 AF area brackets .......................41, 59  
3 Focus points .................. 94, 299, 300  
Spot metering targets................. 116  
4 Focus indicator ...................... 49, 100  
5 Metering......................................... 116  
6 Autoexposure (AE) lock ..............132  
7 Exposure mode.............................118  
8 Shutter speed lock icon ..............130  
9 Shutter speed.......................122, 126  
10 Aperture lock icon........................131  
12  
11 Aperture (f-number) .......... 123, 126 15 “K” (appears when memory  
Aperture (number of stops)  
remains for over 1000  
................................................. 124, 369  
exposures)........................................ 44  
12 ISO sensitivity indicator.............. 110 16 Flash-ready indicator * .......197, 412  
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator..... 113  
13 ISO sensitivity................................ 110  
14 Frame count .................................. 309  
Number of exposures  
17 FV lock indicator...........................197  
18 Flash sync indicator .....................311  
19 Aperture stop indicator ..............124  
20 Battery indicator............................. 43  
21 Exposure indicator.......................127  
Exposure compensation  
display.............................................134  
Tilt indicator ..................................318  
22 Exposure compensation  
X
remaining......................................... 44  
Number of shots remaining before  
memory buffer fills ............... 49, 105  
Preset white balance  
recording indicator...................... 160  
Exposure compensation value .... 134  
PC mode indicator ....................... 257  
indicator .........................................134  
23 Exposure and flash bracketing  
indicator .........................................137  
* Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached (0187). The flash-  
ready indicator lights when the flash is charged.  
D No Battery  
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the  
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a  
malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully-  
charged battery is inserted.  
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays  
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with  
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low  
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.  
13  
The Information Display  
Shooting information, including shutter  
speed, aperture, frame count, number of  
exposures remaining, and AF-area mode, is  
displayed in the monitor when the R button  
is pressed.  
R button  
X
A Turning the Monitor Off  
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the  
R
button twice  
more or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off  
automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds. The  
information display can be restored by pressing the  
R
button.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see  
Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0306). For information on  
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see  
Custom Setting d6 (Information display, 0309).  
14  
X
Exposure mode ................................ 118  
Flexible program indicator............ 121  
Shutter-speed lock icon................. 130  
Exposure indicator...........................127  
Exposure compensation indicator ...134  
Bracketing progress indicator:  
Exposure and flash bracketing....137  
WB bracketing................................141  
ADL bracketing ..............................145  
Number of exposures  
remaining ............................................ 44  
“K” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000  
exposures)............................................ 44  
Frame count ....................................... 44  
Manual lens number .......................216  
Pv button assignment ....82, 119, 321  
Color space indicator.......................183  
Active D-Lighting indicator ...........182  
1
2
3
4
9
Shutter speed .......................... 122, 126  
Exposure compensation value..... 134  
Number of shots in exposure and  
flash bracketing sequence ............ 137  
Number of shots in WB bracketing  
sequence ........................................... 141  
Focal length (non-CPU lenses)..... 216  
Multiple exposure indicator.......... 203  
10  
11  
5
6
12  
Aperture lock icon........................... 131  
Multiple exposure (series)  
13  
14  
15  
16  
indicator............................................. 204  
Aperture (f-number).............. 123, 126  
Aperture (number of stops).... 124, 369  
Bracketing increment............ 138, 142  
Number of shots in ADL bracketing  
sequence ........................................... 145  
Maximum aperture  
7
High ISO noise reduction  
indicator .............................................291  
Shooting menu bank ......................285  
17  
18  
Auto-area AF indicator......................93  
Focus points indicator....................... 94  
AF-area mode indicator.................... 93  
3D-tracking indicator............... 93, 297  
Flash mode ........................................193  
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 216  
Aperture stop indicator.................. 124  
8
19  
20  
Flash sync indicator .........................311  
15  
The Information Display (Continued)  
X
Release mode (single frame/  
continuous) indicator ..................... 102  
Continuous shooting speed  
.................................................... 104, 307  
Clock battery indicator.............35, 386  
Fn button assignment .....................316  
AE-L/AF-L button assignment .........321  
Picture Control indicator ................171  
21  
33  
34  
35  
36  
Long exposure noise reduction  
indicator .............................................291  
Custom settings bank .....................294  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
FV lock indicator .............................. 197  
Interval timer indicator .................. 211  
Image comment indicator............. 331  
37  
38  
39  
Focus mode indicator........................90  
Memory card indicator  
(slot 2) ............................................ 37, 39  
Memory card indicator  
(slot 1) ............................................ 37, 39  
GPS connection indicator...............219  
Copyright information  
indicator............................................. 335  
“Beep” indicator............................... 306  
40  
27  
28  
29  
Vignette control indicator ............. 290  
41  
42  
Exposure compensation  
indicator............................................. 134  
Battery indicator.................................43  
Exposure and flash  
bracketing indicator ........................137  
WB bracketing indicator.................141  
ADL bracketing indicator ...............145  
30  
31  
32  
ADL bracketing amount ................ 146  
Image area indicator..........................79  
16  
Changing Settings in the Information Display  
To change settings for the items listed below,  
press the R button in the information  
display. Highlight items using the multi  
selector and press J to view options for the  
highlighted item.  
R button  
X
1 Shooting menu bank.................. 285  
2 High ISO noise reduction........... 291  
6
7
Fn button assignment................. 316  
AE-L/AF-L button assignment..... 321  
3 Active D-Lighting......................... 181 8 Picture Control.............................. 170  
4 Color space.................................... 183 9 Long exposure noise  
reduction ....................................... 291  
5
Pv button assignment ................ 321  
10 Custom settings bank................. 294  
A Tool Tips  
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the  
information display. Tool tips can be turned off using Custom Setting d7  
(Screen tips; 0310).  
A Viewing Button Assignments  
0, 2, and 4 icons indicate the “button press” function (0316, 321)  
performed respectively by the Pv button, Fn button, and AE-L/AF-L button.  
The “button+command dials” functions (0318) are indicated by 1, 3,  
and 5 icons. If separate functions have been assigned to “button press”  
and “button + command dials,” the latter assignment can be viewed by  
pressing the N button.  
17  
The Camera Strap  
Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera  
body as shown below.  
X
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover  
The supplied BS-2 accessory shoe  
cover can be used to protect the  
accessory shoe or to prevent light  
reflected from the metal parts of  
the shoe from appearing in  
photographs. The BS-2 attaches  
to the camera accessory shoe as  
shown at right.  
To remove the accessory shoe  
cover, hold it down with your  
thumb and slide it off as shown at  
right while keeping a firm grip on  
the camera.  
18  
Quick Start Guide  
Follow these steps for a quick start with the D3S.  
1 Charge the battery (026).  
X
2 Insert the battery (028).  
Attach the battery-chamber cover before  
inserting the battery.  
3 Attach a lens (031).  
Mounting  
index  
Back  
4 Insert a memory card (036).  
19  
5 Turn the camera on (043).  
For information on choosing a language  
and setting the time and date, see page 33.  
See page 41 for information on adjusting  
viewfinder focus.  
X
6 Select single-servo autofocus (047, 90).  
Rotate the focus-mode selector to S (single-servo autofocus).  
7 Focus and shoot (049, 50).  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus, then  
press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
Focus indicator  
down to take the photograph.  
K button  
8 View the  
photograph  
(051).  
20  
s
Tutorial  
This section describes how to use the camera menus, how to ready  
the camera for use, and how to take your first pictures and play  
them back.  
s
Camera Menus ......................................................................... 22  
Using Camera Menus ............................................................................. 23  
Help .............................................................................................................. 25  
First Steps ................................................................................. 26  
Charge the Battery .................................................................................. 26  
Insert the Battery..................................................................................... 28  
Attach a Lens............................................................................................. 31  
Basic Setup................................................................................................. 33  
Insert a Memory Card............................................................................. 36  
Format the Memory Card ..................................................................... 39  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus........................................................................ 41  
Basic Photography and Playback......................................... 43  
Turn the Camera On ............................................................................... 43  
Adjust Camera Settings......................................................................... 46  
Focus and Shoot ...................................................................................... 49  
Viewing Photographs............................................................................. 51  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs ..................................................... 52  
21  
Camera Menus  
Most shooting, playback, and setup options  
can be accessed from the camera menus. To  
view the menus, press the G button.  
G button  
s
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
D: Playback (0274)  
C: Shooting (0284)  
A: Custom Settings (0292)  
B: Setup (0325)  
N: Retouch (0341)  
O/m: My Menu or Recent settings  
(defaults to My Menu; 0359)  
Slider shows position in current menu.  
Current settings are shown by icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
d
If d icon is displayed, help for current item can be viewed by pressing L  
(Q) button (025).  
22  
Using Camera Menus  
Menu Controls  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.  
Multi selector  
Select  
highlighted  
item  
Move cursor up  
Select  
Cancel and return  
to previous menu  
s
highlighted  
item or display  
sub-menu  
J button  
Select highlighted  
item  
Move cursor down  
Navigating the Menus  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
1 Display the menus.  
G button  
Press the G button to display the  
menus.  
2 Highlight the icon for the  
current menu.  
Press 4to highlight the icon  
for the current menu.  
23  
3 Select a menu.  
Press 1or 3to select the desired menu.  
s
4 Position the cursor in the  
selected menu.  
Press 2to position the cursor  
in the selected menu.  
5 Highlight a menu item.  
Press 1or 3to highlight a  
menu item.  
6 Display options.  
Press 2to display options for  
the selected menu item.  
7 Highlight an option.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an  
option.  
24  
8 Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted item.  
To exit without making a selection, press  
the G button.  
J button  
s
Note the following points:  
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.  
• While pressing 2or the center of the multi selector generally has  
the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which  
selection can only be made by pressing J.  
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway (050).  
Help  
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left  
corner of the monitor, help can be displayed  
by pressing the L (Q) button.  
A description of the currently  
selected option or menu will  
be displayed while the button  
is pressed. Press 1or 3to  
scroll through the display.  
L (Q) button  
25  
First Steps  
Charge the Battery  
The D3S is powered by an EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery  
(supplied). To maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the  
supplied MH-22 quick charger before use. About two hours and  
twenty-five minutes are required to fully recharge the battery  
when no charge remains.  
s
1 Plug the charger in.  
Insert the AC adapter plug into the  
battery charger and plug the power  
cable into an electrical outlet.  
2 Remove the terminal cover.  
Remove the terminal cover from the  
battery.  
Terminal cover  
3 Remove the contact protector.  
Remove the contact protector from the  
quick charger battery chamber.  
26  
4 Charge the battery.  
Chamber  
lamps  
Contacts  
Charge  
lamps  
(green)  
s
Guide  
Insert the battery (terminals first), aligning the end of the  
battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the  
direction indicated until it clicks into place. The chamber lamp  
and charge lamps will blink while the battery charges:  
Charge lamps  
80%  
H (blinks) H (blinks) I (off)  
Chamber  
lamp  
Charge state  
Less than 50% of maximum capacity  
50–80% of maximum capacity  
More than 80% but less than 100% of  
maximum capacity  
50%  
100%  
I (off)  
H (blinks) K (glows) H (blinks) I (off)  
H (blinks) K (glows) K (glows) H (blinks)  
100% of maximum capacity  
K (glows) I (off)  
I (off)  
I (off)  
Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops blinking  
and the charge lamps turn off. About two hours and twenty-  
five minutes are required to fully charge an exhausted battery.  
5 Remove the battery when charging is complete.  
Remove the battery and unplug the charger.  
D Calibration  
See page 417 for more information on calibration.  
27  
Insert the Battery  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Power switch  
s
D Inserting and Removing Batteries  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries.  
2 Remove the battery-chamber cover.  
Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn it  
to the open (  
A) position (  
q) and remove  
the BL-4 battery-chamber cover (  
w).  
3 Attach the cover to the battery.  
If the battery release is positioned so that  
the arrow (4) is visible, slide the battery  
release to cover the arrow. Insert the two  
projections on the battery into the  
matching slots in the cover and slide the  
battery release to reveal the arrow.  
D The BL-4 Battery-Chamber Cover  
The battery can be charged with the BL-4 attached. To prevent dust from  
accumulating inside the battery chamber when the battery is not  
inserted, slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow  
(4), remove the BL-4 from the battery, and replace it on the camera.  
The BL-1 battery-chamber cover for D2-series cameras can not be used.  
28  
4 Insert the battery.  
Insert the battery as shown at right.  
5 Latch the cover.  
s
To prevent the battery from  
becoming dislodged during  
operation, rotate the latch to  
the closed position and fold it  
down as shown at right. Be  
sure the cover is securely  
latched.  
D EN-EL4a Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries  
The supplied EN-EL4a shares information with compatible devices,  
enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels (043).  
The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge,  
battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last  
charged (0333). The battery can be recalibrated as necessary to  
ensure that battery level continues to be reported accurately (0417).  
29  
D The Battery and Charger  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii–xx and 388–391  
of this manual.  
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or  
above 40 °C (104 °F). Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the  
vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95 °F); for best results, charge the battery at  
temperatures above 20 °C (68 °F). Battery capacity may temporarily  
drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a  
temperature below the temperature at which it was charged. If the  
battery is charged at a temperature below 5 °C (41 °F), the battery life  
indicator in the Battery info (0333) display may show a temporary  
decrease.  
s
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to  
cool before recharging.  
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in  
use.  
A Compatible Batteries  
The camera can also be used with EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries.  
A Removing the Battery  
Before removing the battery, turn the camera  
off, lift the battery-chamber cover latch, and  
turn it to the open (A) position. To prevent  
short-circuits, replace the terminal cover when  
the battery is not in use.  
30  
Attach a Lens  
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera  
when the lens is removed. An AF Nikkor 85 mm f/1.4D IF lens is  
used in this manual for illustrative purposes.  
Mounting index  
Lens cap  
s
CPU contacts (0368)  
Aperture ring  
A-M mode switch (  
0
32, 99)  
Focus ring (099)  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.  
31  
3 Attach the lens.  
Keeping the mounting  
index on the lens aligned  
with the mounting index  
on the camera body,  
position the lens in the  
camera’s bayonet mount  
Mounting  
index  
(q). Being careful not to press the lens-release button, rotate  
the lens counter-clockwise until it clicks into place (w).  
s
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or  
M/A-M switch, select A (autofocus) or  
M/A (autofocus with manual priority).  
Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or  
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens,  
press and hold the lens release button (q)  
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After  
removing the lens, replace the lens caps  
and camera body cap.  
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings  
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0368), lock  
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).  
A Image Area  
The DX format image area is automatically  
selected when a DX lens is attached (078).  
Image area  
32  
Basic Setup  
The language option in the setup menu is automatically  
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language  
and set the time and date.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Power switch  
s
2 Select Language in the  
G button  
setup menu.  
Press G to display the  
camera menus, then select  
Language in the setup menu.  
For information on using  
menus, see “Using Camera  
Menus” (023).  
3 Select a language.  
Press 1or 3to highlight the  
desired language and press J.  
33  
4 Select Time zone and date.  
Select Time zone and date  
and press 2.  
5 Set time zone.  
Select Time zone and press 2.  
Press 4or 2to highlight the  
local time zone (the UTC field  
shows the difference between  
the selected time zone and  
Coordinated Universal Time, or  
UTC, in hours) and press J.  
s
6 Turn daylight saving time  
on or off.  
Select Daylight saving time  
and press 2. Daylight saving  
time is off by default; if daylight  
saving time is in effect in the local time zone, press 1to  
highlight On and press J.  
7 Set the date and time.  
Select Date and time and  
press 2. Press 4or 2to select  
an item, 1or 3to change.  
Press J when the clock is set to  
the current date and time.  
34  
8 Set date format.  
Select Date format and press  
2. Press 1or 3to choose the  
order in which the year, month,  
and day will be displayed and  
press J.  
9 Exit to shooting mode.  
s
Press the shutter-release button halfway  
to exit to shooting mode.  
A The B Icon  
If a flashing B icon appears in the top control panel the first time the  
camera is used, check that clock settings (including time zone and  
daylight saving time) are correct. The icon disappears when the J  
button is pressed to exit the menu.  
A The Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616  
lithium battery with a life of about four years. When this battery is  
exhausted, a B icon will be displayed in the top control panel while  
the exposure meters are on. For information on replacing the clock  
battery, see page 386.  
A The Camera Clock  
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household  
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and  
reset as necessary.  
A GPS Units (0217)  
If a GPS unit (0376) is connected, the camera clock will be set to the  
time and date provided by the GPS unit (0220).  
A Nikon Transfer  
If the camera is connected to a computer, the supplied Nikon Transfer  
software can be used to synchronize the camera clock with the  
computer (Mac OS X version 10.5.7 excluded). Nikon Transfer can be  
installed from the supplied Software Suite CD.  
35  
Insert a Memory Card  
The camera stores photographs on Type I CompactFlash memory  
cards (available separately; 0419). Type II cards and microdrives  
can not be used. Up to two memory cards can be inserted in the  
camera simultaneously. The following section describes how to  
insert and format a memory card.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Power switch  
s
D Inserting and Removing Memory Cards  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory  
cards.  
2 Open the card slot cover.  
Open the door protecting the card-slot  
cover release button (q) and press the  
release button (w) to open the card slot  
(e).  
36  
A Memory Card Slots  
Slot 1 is for the main card; the card in slot 2 plays  
a backup or secondary role. If the default setting  
of Overflow is selected for Slot 2 (088) when  
two memory cards are inserted, the card in  
slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is  
full.  
Slot 1  
s
Slot 2  
The card currently in use is indicated in the top  
control panel and information display (the  
illustrations at right show the displays when  
two cards are inserted).  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Top control panel  
Information display  
Eject button  
3 Insert the memory card.  
Insert the first memory card in slot 1.  
Slot 2 should be used only if a card is  
already inserted in slot 1. Insert the  
memory card with the rear label toward  
the monitor (q). When the memory  
card is fully inserted, the eject button will  
pop up (w) and the green access lamp  
will light briefly.  
Rear label  
Access lamp  
37  
D Inserting Memory Cards  
Insert the memory card terminals first.  
Inserting the card upside down or backwards  
could damage the camera or the card. Check to  
be sure that the card is in the correct  
orientation.  
Direction of  
insertion  
G B  
4
Terminals  
Rear label  
s
4 Close the card slot cover.  
If this is the first time the memory card  
will be used after being used or  
formatted in another device, format the  
card as described on page 39.  
Removing Memory Cards  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Confirm that the access lamp is off and  
turn the camera off.  
Access lamp  
2 Remove the memory card.  
Open the memory card slot cover (q)  
and press the eject button (w) to  
partially eject the card (e). The memory  
card can then be removed by hand. Do  
not push on the memory card while  
pressing the eject button. Failure to observe this precaution  
could damage the camera or memory card.  
38  
Format the Memory Card  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being  
used or formatted in other devices.  
D Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.  
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a  
computer before proceeding (0254).  
s
1 Turn the camera on.  
2 Press the Q buttons.  
O button I button  
Hold the Q (I and O)  
buttons down simultaneously  
until a blinking C appears  
in the shutter-speed displays  
in the top control panel and  
viewfinder. If two memory  
cards are inserted, the card in  
slot 1 (037) will be selected;  
SHOOT  
you can choose the card in  
slot 2 by rotating the main  
command dial. To exit without  
formatting the memory card,  
wait until C stops blinking  
(about six seconds) or press any button other than the Q  
(I and O) buttons.  
3 Press the Q buttons again.  
Press the Q (I and O) buttons together a second time  
while C is blinking to format the memory card. Do not  
remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power  
source during formatting.  
39  
When formatting is complete, the top  
control panel and viewfinder will show  
the number of photographs that can  
be recorded at current settings and the  
frame-count displays will show B.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
s
D Memory Cards  
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when  
removing memory cards from the camera.  
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do  
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or  
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while  
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to  
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to  
the camera or card.  
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the card.  
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
A No Memory Card  
If no memory card is inserted, the top control  
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the  
camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL4a  
battery and no memory card inserted, S  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
will be displayed in the top control panel.  
A See Also  
See page 326 for information on formatting memory cards using the  
Format memory card option in the setup menu.  
40  
Adjust Viewfinder Focus  
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate  
individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the  
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.  
1 Turn the camera on.  
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.  
s
2 Lift the diopter adjustment control  
(q).  
3 Focus the viewfinder.  
Rotate the diopter adjustment control  
(w) until the viewfinder display, focus  
points, and AF area brackets are in  
sharp focus.  
AF area brackets  
Focus point  
41  
4 Replace the diopter adjustment  
control.  
Push the diopter adjustment control  
back in (e).  
s
A Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses  
Corrective lenses (available separately; 0373)  
can be used to further adjust viewfinder  
diopter. Before attaching a diopter-adjustment  
viewfinder lens, remove the DK-17 viewfinder  
eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to  
release the eyepiece lock (q) and then  
unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right (w).  
42  
Basic Photography and Playback  
Turn the Camera On  
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the  
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described  
below.  
s
1 Turn the camera on.  
Power switch  
Turn the camera on. The  
control panels will turn on and  
the display in the viewfinder  
will light.  
2 Check the battery level.  
Check the battery level in the top control  
panel or viewfinder.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Icon *  
Control panel  
L
Viewfinder  
Description  
Battery fully charged.  
K
J
Battery partially discharged.  
I
Low battery. Prepare to charge battery  
or ready spare battery.  
H
d
H
(blinks)  
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or  
(blinks) exchange battery.  
* No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EH-6 AC adapter.  
43  
3 Check the number of exposures remaining.  
The top control panel shows the  
number of photographs that can be  
taken at current settings. When this  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
number reaches zero, N and n  
icons will flash in the top control  
panel and a flashing j icon will  
appear in the viewfinder as shown at  
s
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
right. No further pictures can be taken  
until you delete pictures or insert a  
new memory card. You may be able to  
take additional pictures at lower  
image quality or size settings.  
A Large-Capacity Memory Cards  
When enough memory remains on the mem-  
ory card to record a thousand or more pictures  
at current settings, the number of exposures  
remaining will be shown in thousands,  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if  
there is room for approximately 1,260 expo-  
sures, the exposure count display will show 1.2 K).  
A The Battery Indicator  
If the segments in the top control panel battery icon blink on and off,  
the camera is calculating the battery charge. The battery level will be  
displayed in about three seconds.  
44  
A Auto Meter Off  
The shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and  
viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six  
seconds (auto meter off), reducing the drain on the battery. Press the  
shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display in the  
viewfinder (050).  
6 s  
s
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Exposure meters on Exposure meters off  
Exposure meters on  
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically  
can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay,  
0305).  
A Camera Off Display  
If the camera is turned off with a battery and  
memory card inserted, the memory card icon,  
frame count, and number of exposures  
remaining will be displayed (some memory  
cards may in rare cases only display this  
information when the camera is on).  
Top control panel  
45  
Adjust Camera Settings  
This tutorial describes the basic steps involved in taking photos.  
1 Choose exposure mode e.  
I button  
Press the I button and rotate the  
main command dial to select exposure  
mode e. The camera will automatically  
adjust shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure in most situations.  
s
Main command  
dial  
2 Choose single frame  
Release mode dial  
lock release  
release mode.  
Hold the release mode dial lock  
release down and turn the  
release mode dial to S (single  
frame). At this setting, the  
camera will take one  
photograph each time the  
shutter-release button is  
pressed.  
Release mode dial  
46  
3 Choose single-point AF.  
AF-area mode  
selector  
Rotate the AF-area mode  
selector until it clicks into place  
pointing to K (single-point  
AF). At this setting, the user  
can choose the focus point.  
s
Focus point  
4 Choose single-servo  
Focus-mode  
selector  
autofocus.  
Rotate the focus-mode selector  
until it clicks into place  
pointing to S (single-servo  
autofocus). At this setting, the  
camera will automatically focus  
on the subject in the selected  
focus point when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in  
focus.  
47  
5 Choose matrix metering.  
Metering selector  
Press the metering selector  
lock button and rotate the  
metering selector to Y (matrix  
metering). Matrix metering  
uses information from the  
1,005-pixel RGB sensor to  
ensure optimal results for the entire frame.  
6 Check camera settings.  
Exposure mode  
s
Metering  
Viewfinder display  
Focus mode  
Top control panel  
48  
Focus and Shoot  
1 Press the shutter-  
release button  
halfway to focus  
(050).  
Focus point  
At default settings, the  
camera will focus on the  
subject in the center  
focus point. Frame a  
photo in the viewfinder  
with the main subject  
positioned in the center  
s
Focus  
indicator  
Buffer  
capacity  
focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway. If  
the camera is able to focus, the in-focus indicator (I) will  
appear in the viewfinder.  
Viewfinder display  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
2
Focus point is between camera and subject.  
Focus point is behind subject.  
4
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus  
point using autofocus.  
2 4  
(blinks)  
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,  
focus will lock and the number of exposures that  
can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; 0105)  
will be shown in the viewfinder display.  
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus  
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”  
(098).  
49  
2 Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down to shoot.  
Smoothly press the shutter-  
release-button the rest of the  
way down to take the picture.  
While the photograph is being  
recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the card  
slot cover will light. Do not eject the memory card or remove or  
disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out.  
Access lamp  
s
A The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera  
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the  
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.  
Focus  
Take photograph  
50  
Viewing Photographs  
1 Press the K button.  
K button  
A photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
The memory card  
containing the picture  
currently displayed is  
shown by an icon.  
s
2 View additional pictures.  
Additional pictures can be  
displayed by pressing 4or 2.  
To view additional information  
on the current photograph,  
press 1and 3(0225).  
N
I
KON  
D3S  
1
/10  
.
1
125 F5  
6
200  
85mm  
/
AUTO 0,  
100NCD3S  
0
_
.
D
S
C
0001 JP  
G
MAL  
425N6Ox2R832  
:
:
15  
/
04  
/
2009 10 15 00  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway.  
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0281),  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting.  
A See Also  
See page 224 for information on choosing a memory card slot.  
51  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press  
the O button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once  
deleted.  
1 Display the photograph.  
Display the photograph you wish to  
delete as described in “Viewing  
Photographs” on the previous page.  
s
2 Delete the photograph.  
Press the O button. A  
confirmation dialog will  
be displayed (the location  
of the current picture is  
shown by the icon in the  
bottom left corner of the  
dialog).  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the image and return to  
playback. To exit without deleting the picture, press K.  
A Delete  
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which  
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu  
(0242).  
52  
x
Framing Pictures in the  
Monitor (Live View)  
This chapter describes how to frame pictures in the monitor using x  
live view.  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor ................................. 54  
53  
Framing Photographs in the  
Monitor  
Press the a button to frame pictures in the monitor. The following  
options are available:  
Tripod (h): Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod  
(055). You can zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor  
for precise focus, making this option suitable for static subjects.  
Contrast-detect autofocus can be used to compose photographs  
with the subject positioned anywhere in the frame.  
Hand-held (g): Choose when taking hand-held shots of moving  
subjects, or when framing photographs at angles that make it  
difficult to use the viewfinder (059). Camera focuses normally  
using phase-detection autofocus.  
x
A Phase-Detection Versus Contrast-Detect AF  
The camera normally uses phase-detection autofocus, in which focus is  
adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor. When Tripod is  
selected in live view, however, the camera uses contrast-detect  
autofocus, in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor  
and adjusts focus to produce the greatest contrast. Contrast-detect  
autofocus takes longer than phase-detection autofocus.  
A Flicker  
You may notice flicker or banding in the monitor during live view or  
when shooting movies under certain types of lighting, such as  
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps. Flicker and banding can be  
reduced by choosing a Flicker reduction option that matches the  
frequency of the local AC power supply (0330).  
54  
Tripod Mode (h)  
1 Frame a picture in the viewfinder.  
With the camera mounted on a tripod or resting on a stable,  
level surface, frame the subject in the viewfinder.  
2 Choose Tripod for Live G button  
view mode in the  
shooting menu.  
x
Press the G button and  
select the shooting menu.  
Select Live view mode,  
highlight Tripod, and press J.  
3 Press the a button.  
The mirror will be raised  
and the view through the  
lens will be displayed in  
the camera monitor  
a button  
instead of the viewfinder.  
55  
4 Focus.  
Autofocus (focus mode S or C): In  
tripod mode, the focus point for  
contrast-detect autofocus can  
be moved to any point in the  
frame using the multi selector.  
n is displayed when the focus  
point is at the center of the  
Contrast-detect focus point  
frame except when the view through the lens is zoomed in.  
x
To focus using contrast-detect  
B button  
autofocus, press the B button. The  
focus point will blink green and the  
monitor may brighten while the camera  
focuses. If the camera is able to focus  
using contrast-detect autofocus, the  
focus point will be displayed in green; if  
the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will blink red.  
D Contrast-Detect Autofocus  
The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the B button  
is pressed in continuous-servo autofocus mode. In both single-  
servo and continuous-servo autofocus modes, the shutter can be  
released even when the camera is not in focus.  
Manual focus (focus mode M; 099): Use zoom for precise focus.  
56  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 × and check  
focus, press the N button and rotate the main command dial.  
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a navigation  
window will appear in the bottom right corner of the display.  
+
N button  
Main command dial  
x
Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame  
not visible in the monitor.  
D Exposure Preview  
In tripod mode, you can preview exposure  
in the monitor by pressing J. Exposure is  
set using matrix metering and can be  
adjusted by 5 EV (0134), although only  
values between –3 and +3 EV are reflected  
in the preview display. Note that the  
preview may not accurately reflect exposure  
when an optional flash unit is attached, Active D-Lighting (0181)  
or bracketing is in effect, p is selected for shutter speed, or the  
subject is very bright or dark. Exposure preview is not available  
when A is selected for shutter speed.  
5 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down to take the picture.  
The monitor turns off  
during shooting and turns  
back on once the photograph is recorded.  
57  
6 End live view.  
Press the a button to end live view.  
x
D Focusing with Contrast-Detect Autofocus  
Contrast-detect autofocus will take longer than normal (phase-  
detection) autofocus. In the following situations, the camera may be  
unable to focus using contrast-detect autofocus:  
• The camera is not mounted on a tripod  
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
• The subject lacks contrast  
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting  
brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or  
other light source that changes in brightness  
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor, sodium-  
vapor, or similar lighting  
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns  
(e.g., windows in a skyscraper)  
• The subject is moving  
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when  
the camera is unable to focus.  
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other  
lenses or teleconverters.  
A Remote Cords  
If the shutter-release button on a remote cord (available separately; see  
0376) is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode, it will  
activate contrast-detect autofocus. If the remote cord shutter-release  
button is pressed all the way down without focusing, focus will not be  
adjusted before the picture is taken.  
58  
Hand-Held Mode (g)  
1 Choose Hand-held for G button  
Live view mode in the  
shooting menu.  
Press the G button and  
select the shooting menu.  
Select Live view mode,  
highlight Hand-held, and press J.  
x
2 Press the a button.  
The mirror will be raised  
and the view through the  
lens will be displayed in  
the camera monitor  
a button  
instead of the viewfinder.  
3 Frame a picture in the monitor.  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 ×, press the N  
button and rotate the main command dial.  
+
N button  
Main command dial  
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a  
navigation window will appear in the bottom right  
corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll  
within the AF area brackets.  
59  
4 Focus.  
Autofocus (focus mode S or C):  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway or press the  
B button. The camera will  
focus normally and set  
exposure. Note that the mirror will click back into place while  
either button is pressed, temporarily interrupting live view.  
Live view is restored when the button is released.  
x
Manual focus (focus mode M; 099): Focus using the lens focus  
ring.  
5 Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way  
down to reset focus and exposure and take the  
picture. The monitor turns off during shooting and turns back  
on once the photograph is recorded.  
6 End live view.  
Press the a button to end live view.  
60  
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
Although they will not appear in the final picture, flicker, banding, or  
distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury  
vapor, or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or if an  
object moves at high speed through the frame. Bright spots may also  
appear. When shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at  
the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Noise may be audible when the camera adjusts aperture. Note that no  
pictures can be taken in live view if a CPU lens with an aperture ring is  
attached with Aperture ring selected for Custom Setting f8 (Customize  
command dials) > Aperture setting (0323). Select Sub-command  
dial when using a CPU lens with an aperture ring.  
x
Shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed.  
Live view mode can be used for up to an hour. Note, however, that  
when used in live view mode for extended periods, the camera may  
become noticeably warm and its internal temperature may rise,  
resulting in noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog). To prevent  
damage to the camera’s internal circuits, shooting will end  
automatically before the camera overheats. A count-down display will  
appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient  
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view  
mode is selected.  
During live view, the camera displays shutter speed and aperture based  
on the lighting conditions metered at the start of live view. Exposure is  
metered again for the current subject when the shutter-release button  
is pressed all the way down.  
A m icon in the monitor indicates that On is selected for Movie  
settings > High-sensitivity movie mode in the shooting menu (072).  
Live view is adjusted for sensitivities of from ISO 6400 to Hi 3, but  
photographs are taken at the sensitivity selected for ISO sensitivity  
settings in the shooting menu (0110).  
Metering can not be changed during live view. Choose a metering  
method before starting live view. To reduce blur in tripod mode, choose  
On for Custom Setting d9 (Exposure delay mode, 0310). To prevent  
light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure, close  
the viewfinder eyepiece shutter (0106).  
61  
A The Information Display  
To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode, press the  
R button.  
Information on  
Virtual horizon *  
Information off  
x
Information  
+ histogram  
(exposure  
Framing  
guides *  
preview  
only; 057) *  
* Not displayed during zoom.  
A AF area brackets  
AF area brackets are displayed only in hand-held mode.  
Hand-held  
Tripod  
62  
D No Picture  
After shooting, play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the  
photograph has been recorded. In hand-held mode, note that the  
sound the mirror makes when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway or the B button is pressed can be mistaken for the sound of  
the shutter, and that if single-servo AF is used, a photograph will only be  
recorded if the camera is able to focus.  
A Monitor Brightness  
Except during exposure preview, monitor  
brightness can be adjusted by pressing the K  
and 2button. The brightness indicator at the  
right of the display will turn yellow; keeping  
the K button pressed, press 1or 3to adjust  
brightness (note that monitor brightness has  
no effect on pictures taken in live view mode).  
To return to live view, release the K button.  
x
A HDMI  
If live view is used while the camera is  
attached to an HDMI video device, the  
camera monitor will turn off and the  
video device will display the view  
through the lens as shown at right.  
Press the R button to turn the  
histogram display on and off during  
exposure preview (057).  
63  
x
64  
y
Recording and Viewing  
Movies  
This chapter describes how to record movies in live view.  
y
Recording Movies.................................................................... 66  
Viewing Movies........................................................................ 73  
Editing Movies ......................................................................... 74  
65  
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded at 24 fps by pressing the Pv button in live  
view mode. If desired, choose a Picture Control (0170) and color  
space (0183) before recording.  
1 Choose a live view mode  
G button  
in the shooting menu.  
Press G and select the  
shooting menu. Select Live  
view mode, highlight an  
option, and press J:  
y
Tripod: In modes g and h, movies are recorded at the selected  
aperture (0123, 125).  
Hand-held: The camera automatically adjusts aperture in  
response to changes in subject brightness.  
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method  
selected. The camera adjusts shutter speed and ISO sensitivity  
automatically.  
2 Press the a button.  
The mirror is raised and the view through  
the lens is displayed in the monitor  
instead of the viewfinder.  
a button  
Shutter speed and sensitivity are  
displayed in live view and during  
recording, but do not always apply to  
movies. In Tripod mode, an exposure  
preview can be displayed in live view or  
during recording by pressing J.  
66  
D The 0 Icon  
A 0 icon indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
3 Focus.  
B button  
Focus before starting recording.  
Frame the opening shot and  
either press the B button  
(Tripod) or press the shutter-  
release button halfway (Hand-  
held) to focus on your subject.  
In hand-held mode, autofocus is not available after recording  
begins.  
y
Pv button  
j icon  
4 Start recording.  
Press the Pv button or the  
center of the multi selector  
to start recording. Both  
video and monaural sound  
are recorded; do not cover  
the microphone during  
recording (the built-in  
Time remaining  
microphone is located on the front of the camera). The j  
icon blinks and the time available is displayed in the monitor.  
Exposure can be altered by up to 3 EV using exposure  
compensation; note, however, that changes to exposure,  
including AE lock and exposure compensation, can only be  
made during exposure preview.  
A Focusing During Recording  
To focus in tripod mode using contrast-detect autofocus, press the  
B
button. Autofocus is not available in hand-held mode after  
recording begins; use manual focus to focus during recording (099;  
note that in hand-held mode, recording will end if the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway or the  
B
button is pressed).  
67  
5 End recording.  
Press the Pv button again to end recording (to end recording  
and take a still picture in live view, press the shutter-release  
button all the way down). Recording will end automatically  
when the maximum size is reached or the memory card is full.  
A Maximum Size  
Individual movie files can be up to 2 GB in size. The maximum  
length is 5 minutes for movies with a frame size of 1280 × 720, 20  
minutes for other movies; note that depending on memory card  
write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached.  
y
A Flicker  
You may notice flicker or banding in the monitor during live view or  
when shooting movies under certain types of lighting, such as  
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps. Flicker and banding can be  
reduced by choosing a Flicker reduction option that matches the  
frequency of the local AC power supply (0330).  
A See Also  
Frame size, microphone sensitivity, high-sensitivity movie mode, and  
card slot options are available in the Movie settings menu (070). The  
role played by the center of the multi selector (either selecting the  
center focus point or toggling zoom) can be selected using Custom  
Setting f1 (Multi selector center button; 0314), and the behavior of  
the AE-L/AF-L button can be adjusted using Custom Setting f6 (Assign  
AE-L/AF-L button; 0321).  
A Adjusting Microphone Sensitivity  
Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted  
without leaving live view. Before starting  
recording, hold the K button and press 4or  
H. The microphone settings icon will turn  
yellow. Keep the K or H button pressed and  
press 1and 3to adjust microphone  
sensitivity.  
68  
D Recording Movies  
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the  
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the  
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed  
through frame. Jagged edges, false colors, moiré, and bright spots may  
also appear. If a flash or other light source with brief duration is used  
during recording, bright bands may appear or the top or bottom of the  
frame may brighten. When recording movies, avoid pointing the  
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Depending on the brightness of the subject, changes to exposure may  
have no visible effect. Note that movies can not be recorded if a CPU  
lens with an aperture ring is attached with Aperture ring selected for  
Custom Setting f8 (Customize command dials) > Aperture setting  
(0323). Select Sub-command dial when using a CPU lens with an  
aperture ring.  
y
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed.  
When used in live view mode for extended periods, the camera’s  
internal temperature may rise, resulting in noise (randomly-spaced  
bright pixels or fog; the camera may also become noticeably warm, but  
this does not indicate a malfunction). To prevent damage to the  
camera’s internal circuits, recording will end automatically before the  
camera overheats. A count-down display will appear in the monitor  
30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient temperatures, this display  
may appear immediately when live view mode is selected.  
Sounds made by the camera lens when aperture is adjusted or during  
focusing may be picked up by the microphone in tripod mode.  
69  
Movie Settings  
Adjust movie settings before recording.  
1 Select Movie settings G button  
in the shooting menu.  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Movie settings  
in the shooting menu and  
press 2.  
y
2 Choose movie options.  
To choose a frame size,  
highlight Quality and press 2.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J to select:  
Option  
Frame size (pixels)  
1280 × 720  
640 × 424  
Maximum length  
1280×720 (16:9) *  
640×424 (3:2)  
320×216 (3:2)  
5 min.  
a
b
c
20 min.  
320 × 216  
* Available only when FX format is selected for Image area; if another  
option is selected, frame size will be 640 × 424.  
A Frame Size  
If the aspect ratio of the crop currently  
selected for still images differs from that  
of the movie frame, guides showing the  
movie frame crop will be displayed during  
live view when indicators are hidden  
(062). The area outside the movie frame  
crop is grayed out during recording.  
70  
To turn the built-in or external microphone on or off or to  
adjust microphone sensitivity, highlight Microphone and  
press 2. To turn sound recording off, highlight Microphone  
off and press J. To turn recording on and adjust microphone  
sensitivity automatically, select Auto sensitivity (A).  
Selecting any other option turns recording on and sets the  
microphone to the selected sensitivity.  
A Using an External Microphone  
Instead of the built-in microphone, commercially-available external  
microphones can be used to avoid picking up sounds produced by  
the lens during focusing or vibration reduction. Stereo recording is  
available with any microphone that has a stereo mini-pin jack  
(3.5mm diameter).  
y
To choose a destination when using two  
memory cards, highlight Destination  
and press 2. Select a slot and press J.  
The menu shows the time available on  
each card; recording ends automatically  
when no time remains.  
71  
To adjust ISO sensitivity to suit lighting  
conditions, highlight High-sensitivity  
movie mode and press 2. If lighting is  
so poor that the subject is difficult to see  
with the naked eye, highlight On and  
press J to shoot at ISO sensitivities of  
ISO 6400 to Hi 3 (a m icon will be  
displayed in the monitor). Select Off to  
shoot at ISO sensitivities between ISO  
200 and ISO 12800.  
A High-Sensitivity Movie Mode  
y
Movies shot at high sensitivities are prone to noise (randomly-spaced  
bright pixels, fog, or lines) and after-images of light sources and other  
bright objects. If the subject is brightly lit, highlights may be “washed  
out” and details may be lost. Check the results in the monitor and turn  
high-sensitivity movie mode off if necessary. Note that the camera may  
have difficulty focusing using contrast-detect autofocus.  
Although m is displayed whenever high-sensitivity mode is enabled,  
photographs taken while high-sensitivity movie mode is in effect are  
shot at the ISO sensitivity selected for ISO sensitivity in the shooting  
menu (0110).  
72  
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0222).  
Press the center of the multi selector to start playback.  
1 icon  
Length  
Current position/total length  
Volume  
The following operations can be performed:  
Guide y  
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
3/J Pause playback.  
Resume playback when movie is paused or  
during rewind/advance.  
Play  
Speed doubles with each  
press, from 2× to 4× to 8×  
Rewind/  
advance  
to 16×; keep pressed to skip to beginning or end  
of movie. If playback is paused, movie rewinds  
or advances one frame at a time; keep pressed  
for continuous rewind or advance.  
4/2  
N+ Hold N and press 1to increase volume, 3to  
1/3 decrease.  
Adjust volume  
Trim movie  
J
See page 74 for more information.  
Resume  
shooting  
Monitor turns off. Photographs can be taken  
immediately.  
Display menus  
Exit  
G
See page 273 for more information.  
1/K Exit to full-frame playback.  
A 2 icon  
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback  
if the movie was recorded without sound.  
73  
Editing Movies  
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected  
frames as JPEG stills. To view movie retouch options, display a  
movie in full-frame playback and press J.  
Trimming Movies  
1 Choose an option.  
To trim the opening footage  
from the copy, highlight  
Choose start point in the edit  
movie menu and press J.  
Select Choose end point to  
trim the ending footage.  
y
2 View the movie and choose a  
starting or end point.  
Press the center of the multi selector to  
start or resume playback, 3to pause, and  
4or 2to rewind or advance (073;  
pause to rewind or advance one frame at  
a time). To adjust volume, hold N and press 1and 3. With  
the movie paused on the desired frame, press 1to delete all  
frames before (Choose start point) or after (Choose end  
point) the selected frame. Starting and ending frames are  
shown by h and i icons.  
74  
3 Save the copy.  
Select Yes and press J to save the edited  
copy. If necessary, the copy can be  
trimmed as described above to remove  
additional footage. Edited copies are  
indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame  
playback.  
D Trimming Movies  
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The current position will  
be displayed in red if creating a copy at the current playback  
position would result in a movie less than two seconds long. The  
copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the  
memory card.  
y
To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly, use a fully-  
charged battery when editing movies.  
A The Retouch Menu  
Movies can also be edited from the retouch  
menu (0341).  
75  
Saving Selected Frames  
1 Choose Save selected  
frame.  
To save a selected frame as a  
JPEG still, highlight Save  
selected frame in the edit  
movie menu and press J.  
2 View the movie and choose a frame.  
Press the center of the multi selector to  
start or resume playback, 3to pause, and  
y
4or 2to rewind or advance (073;  
pause to rewind or advance one frame at  
a time). To adjust volume, hold N and press 1and 3.  
Starting and ending frames are shown by h and i icons. With  
the movie paused on the desired frame, press 1.  
3 Save the selected frame.  
Select Yes and press J to  
create a JPEG copy of the  
selected frame. Movie stills are  
indicated by a 9 icon in full-  
frame playback.  
A Save Selected Frame  
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not  
retouched and lack some categories of photo information (0225).  
76  
d
Image Recording Options  
This section describes how to choose image area, quality, and size  
and how to choose the role played by memory card slot 2.  
Image Area ............................................................................... 78  
Image Quality........................................................................... 83  
Image Size................................................................................. 86  
Slot 2.......................................................................................... 88  
d
77  
Image Area  
The camera’s FX format (36.0 × 23.9 mm)  
image sensor can be used to record pictures  
with an image area (picture angle)  
equivalent to a 35mm (135) format film  
camera. Image area is selected using the  
Image area option in the shooting menu. At  
the default setting of Auto DX crop, the camera will automatically  
crop pictures to the DX picture angle when a DX format lens is  
attached. The Choose image area option can be used to select a  
35mm picture angle or to crop photographs to the DX format or  
1.2 × picture angle or to a 5 : 4 aspect ratio.  
d
Auto DX Crop  
Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens  
is attached.  
Option  
On  
Description  
Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is  
attached. If another lens is attached, the crop selected for  
Choose image area will be used.  
Off  
Crop selected for Choose image area is used.  
78  
Choose Image Area  
Choose the image area used when a non-DX lens is attached or a  
DX-lens is attached with Off selected for Auto DX crop (081).  
Option  
Description  
Images are recorded in FX format using the full area  
of the image sensor (36.0 × 23.9 mm), producing a  
picture angle equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a  
35mm format camera. The edges of pictures taken  
with DX format lenses will be blacked out.  
A 30.0 × 20.0 mm area at the center of the image  
sensor is used to record photographs. To calculate  
the approximate focal length of the lens in 35mm  
format, multiply by 1.2. The edges of pictures taken  
with DX format lenses will be blacked out.  
FX (36×24)  
1.0×  
(FX format)  
c
Z
1.2× (30×20)  
1.2×  
d
An area at the center of the image sensor  
DX (24×16)  
1.5×  
(DX format)  
23.5 × 15.6 mm is used to record pictures in DX  
format. To calculate the approximate focal length of  
the lens in 35mm format, multiply by 1.5.  
a
b
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4  
5 : 4 (30×24) (30.0 × 23.9 mm). The edges of pictures taken with  
DX format lenses will be blacked out.  
FX format  
DX format  
DX format (24×16)  
image circle  
5 : 4  
1.2×  
FX format (36×24)  
image circle  
79  
A Image Area  
The selected option is shown in the information  
display.  
A DX Lenses  
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a  
smaller picture angle than lenses for 35mm format cameras. If Auto DX  
crop is off and an option other than DX (24×16) (DX format) is selected  
for Image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may  
be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the  
images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the  
edges of the picture are blacked out.  
d
A The Viewfinder Display  
The 1.2 ×, DX format, and 5 : 4 crops are shown below.  
1.2×  
DX format  
5 : 4  
80  
Image area can be set using the Image area option in the  
shooting menu or by pressing the Fn button and rotating a  
command dial.  
The Image Area Menu  
1 Select Image area in  
G button  
the shooting menu.  
Press G to display the  
menus. Highlight Image  
area in the shooting  
menu (0284) and press  
2.  
d
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight Auto DX crop or  
Choose image area and  
press 2.  
3 Adjust settings.  
Choose an option and press J.  
The selected crop is displayed  
in the viewfinder (080).  
81  
The Fn Button  
The image area can be selected  
by pressing the Fn button and  
rotating the main or sub-  
command dial until the desired  
crop is displayed in the viewfinder  
(080). This operation can not be  
performed during live view or  
while a multiple exposure is being  
recorded.  
Fn button  
Main  
command dial  
The option currently selected for  
image area can be viewed by pressing the Fn  
button to display the image area in the top  
control panel or information display. FX  
format is displayed as “36×24, 1.2 × as  
“30×20, DX format as “24×16, and 5 : 4 as  
“30 × 24.  
d
D Auto DX Crop  
The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is  
attached and Auto DX crop is on.  
A The Fn, Pv, and AE-L/AF-L Buttons  
Changes to image area settings can be made using the Fn button  
(Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn button; 0316), the Pv button (Custom  
setting f5, Assign preview button; 0321), or the AE-L/AF-L button  
(Custom Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button; 0321). Note that some  
“button press” options can not be combined with options using  
“+command dials.”  
A Image Size  
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.  
82  
Image Quality  
The D3S supports the following image quality options. See page  
420 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored  
at different image quality and size settings.  
Option  
File type  
Description  
RAW data from the image sensor are saved  
directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic  
Format (NEF). Use with images that will be  
transferred to a computer for printing or  
processing.  
NEF (RAW)  
NEF  
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit  
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is  
(RGB) supported by a wide variety of imaging  
applications.  
TIFF  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine  
d
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
roughly 1:4 (fine image quality). *  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
JPEG normal JPEG  
JPEG basic  
roughly 1:8 (normal image quality). *  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
roughly 1:16 (basic image quality). *  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG fine  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image  
and one fine-quality JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW)+  
NEF/ Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image  
JPEG normal JPEG and one normal-quality JPEG image.  
NEF (RAW)+  
JPEG basic  
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image  
and one basic-quality JPEG image.  
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.  
83  
Image quality is set by pressing  
the QUAL button and rotating the  
main command dial until the  
desired setting is displayed in the  
rear control panel.  
QUAL button  
Main  
command dial  
Rear control panel  
d
A NEF (RAW)  
Once transferred to a computer, NEF (RAW) images can only be viewed  
using ViewNX (available on the supplied Software Suite CD) or  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0375). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0353). Note that the option selected for image size  
does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images.  
A NEF (RAW)+JPEG  
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed  
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG  
image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same  
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If  
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the  
Slot 2 > RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 option, deleting the JPEG copy will  
not delete the NEF (RAW) image.  
A The Image Quality Menu  
Image quality can also be adjusted using the  
Image quality option in the shooting menu  
(0284).  
84  
The following options can be  
accessed from the shooting  
menu. Press the G button to  
display the menus, highlight  
the desired option and press 2.  
G button  
JPEG Compression  
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.  
Option  
Description  
Images are compressed to produce relatively  
uniform file size.  
Size priority  
O
P
Optimal  
quality  
Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene  
recorded.  
d
NEF (RAW) Recording > Type  
Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.  
Option  
Description  
NEF images are compressed using a reversible  
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%  
with no effect on image quality.  
Lossless  
compressed  
N
NEF images are compressed using a non-  
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about  
40–55% with almost no effect on image quality.  
O Compressed  
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.  
NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth  
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.  
Option  
Description  
q 12-bit NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.  
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 14 bits,  
r 14-bit producing files larger than 12-bit files but increasing the  
color data recorded.  
85  
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large, Medium, or  
Small (note that image size varies depending on the option  
selected for Image area, 078):  
Image area  
Option Size (pixels)  
Print size (cm/in.) *  
36.0 × 24.0/14.2 × 9.4  
27.0 × 17.9/10.6 × 7.1  
18.0 × 12.0/ 7.1 × 4.7  
30.1 ×20.0/11.8 × 7.9  
22.5 × 15.0/ 8.9 × 5.9  
15.0 × 10.0/ 5.9 × 3.9  
23.6 × 15.6/ 9.3 × 6.2  
17.6 × 11.7/ 6.9 × 4.6  
11.8 × 7.8/ 4.6 × 3.1  
30.1 × 24.0/11.8 × 9.4  
22.5 × 17.9/ 8.9 × 7.1  
15.0 × 12.0/ 5.9 × 4.7  
L
M
S
4,256 × 2,832  
3,184 × 2,120  
2,128 × 1,416  
3,552 × 2,368  
2,656 × 1,776  
1,776 × 1,184  
2,784 × 1,848  
2,080 × 1,384  
1,392 × 920  
3,552 × 2,832  
2,656 × 2,120  
1,776 × 1,416  
FX (36×24) 1.0×  
(FX format)  
L
M
S
L
M
S
1.2× (30×20)  
1.2×  
d
DX (24×16) 1.5×  
(DX format)  
L
M
S
5 : 4 (30×24)  
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image  
size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch  
(dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).  
Image size can be set by pressing  
the QUAL button and rotating the  
sub-command dial until the  
desired option is displayed in the  
rear control panel.  
QUAL button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Rear control panel  
86  
A NEF (RAW) Images  
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of  
NEF (RAW) images. When opened in software such as ViewNX  
(supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately), NEF (RAW) images  
have the dimensions given for large (L-size) images in the table on the  
previous page.  
A The Image Size Menu  
Image size can also be adjusted using the  
Image size option in the shooting menu  
(0284).  
d
87  
Slot 2  
Use the Slot 2 option in the shooting menu (0 284) to choose the  
role played by the memory card in slot 2.  
Option  
Rear control panel  
Description  
The memory card in slot 2 is  
used to record photographs  
when the memory card in  
slot 1 is full.  
Overflow  
P
Q
Each photograph is recorded  
to both memory cards.  
Backup  
At image quality settings of  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF  
(RAW) image is recorded to  
the memory card in slot 1,  
the JPEG image to the  
memory card in slot 2. At  
other image qualities, this  
option is the same as  
d
RAW Slot 1 -  
JPEG Slot 2  
R
Backup.  
For information on saving movies to a selected slot, see page 71.  
D Backup/RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2  
When the above options are selected, the shutter-release will be  
disabled when either of the memory cards is full. The viewfinder and  
top control panel show the number of exposures remaining on the card  
with the least amount of available memory. Voice memos (0 248) are  
appended to the copy recorded to the memory card in slot 1.  
88  
N
Focus  
– Controlling How the Camera Focuses  
This section describes the options that control how your camera  
focuses.  
Focus Mode .............................................................................. 90  
AF-Area Mode .......................................................................... 92  
Focus Point Selection ............................................................. 94  
Focus Lock ................................................................................ 96  
Manual Focus ........................................................................... 99  
N
89  
Focus Mode  
Focus mode is controlled by the  
focus-mode selector on the front of  
the camera. There are two  
Focus-mode selector  
autofocus (AF) modes, in which the  
camera focuses automatically  
when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway, and one manual  
focus mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually using the  
focus ring on the lens:  
Option  
Description  
Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. Focus locks when in-focus indicator (I) appears  
in viewfinder, and remains locked while shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway (focus lock). At default settings,  
shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is  
displayed (focus priority).  
S
Single-servo  
AF  
N
Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway. If subject moves, camera will engage  
predictive focus tracking (091) to predict final distance to  
subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings,  
shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus  
(release priority).  
C
Continuous-  
servo AF  
Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be  
adjusted manually using the lens focus ring. If maximum  
aperture of lens is f/5.6 or faster, viewfinder focus indicator  
can be used to confirm focus (electronic range finding;  
0100), but photographs can be taken at any time,  
whether or not subject is in focus.  
M
Manual  
(099)  
Choose single-servo AF for landscapes and other stationary  
subjects. Continuous-servo AF may be a better choice with  
erratically-moving subjects. Manual focus is recommended when  
the camera is unable to focus using autofocus.  
90  
A The B Buttons  
For the purpose of focusing the camera,  
pressing either of the B buttons has the  
same effect as pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway; note, however, that vibration  
reduction (available with VR lenses) can only  
be engaged by pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
B button  
B button for  
vertical shooting  
A Predictive Focus Tracking  
In continuous-servo AF, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking  
if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway or either of the B buttons is  
pressed. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to  
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.  
N
A See Also  
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see  
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0295). For information on  
using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S  
priority selection, 0296). For information on preventing the camera  
from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, see  
Custom Setting a5 (AF activation, 0298).  
91  
AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode determines how the  
focus point is selected in autofocus  
mode (090). To select the AF-area  
mode, rotate the AF-area mode  
selector. The following options are  
available:  
AF-area mode selector  
Mode  
Description  
User selects focus point manually; camera focuses on  
subject in selected focus point only. Use for relatively static  
compositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus  
point.  
K
Single-  
point AF  
In continuous-servo AF ( 90), user selects focus point  
0
N
manually; if subject briefly leaves selected focus point,  
camera will focus based on information from surrounding  
points. Number of focus points used can be selected from  
9, 21, and 51 using Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area,  
0296). If 51 points (3D-tracking) is selected for Custom  
Setting a3, focus point will be selected automatically  
using 3D-tracking.  
I
Dynamic-  
area AF  
In single-servo AF, user selects focus point manually; camera  
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.  
Camera automatically detects  
subject and selects focus point. If  
type G or D lens is used, camera can  
distinguish human subjects from  
H
Auto-area background for improved subject  
AF  
detection. In single-servo AF, active  
focus points are highlighted for  
about one second after camera focuses. Active focus points  
are not displayed in continuous-servo AF.  
92  
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode is shown in the information  
display.  
AF-area mode  
indicator  
AF-area mode  
Information display  
K
Single-point AF  
Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, 0296)  
9 points  
21 points  
51 points  
N
Dynamic  
-area AF *  
I
51 points (3D-tracking)  
H
Auto-area AF  
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus  
points provide information to assist focus operation.  
A Manual Focus  
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.  
A See Also  
For information on the settings available in dynamic-area AF, see  
Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, 0296). For information on  
adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object  
moves in front of the camera, see Custom Setting a4 (Focus tracking  
with lock-on, 0298).  
93  
Focus Point Selection  
The D3S offers a choice of 51 focus  
points that together cover a wide  
area of the frame. The focus point  
can be selected manually, allowing  
photographs to be composed with  
the main subject positioned almost  
AF-area mode selector  
anywhere in the frame (single-  
point and dynamic-area AF), or automatically (auto-area AF; note  
that manual focus point detection is not available when auto-area  
AF is selected). To select the focus point manually:  
1 Rotate the focus selector  
lock to .  
N
This allows the multi selector to  
be used to select the focus  
point.  
Focus selector lock  
2 Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to select  
the focus point. The center  
focus point can be selected by  
pressing the center of the multi  
selector.  
The focus selector lock can be  
rotated to the locked (L)  
position following selection to  
prevent the selected focus  
point from changing when the multi selector is pressed.  
94  
A Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs  
When framing shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation, use the command  
dials to select the focus point. For more information, see Custom  
Setting f4 (Assign Fn button, 0316).  
A See Also  
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see  
Custom Setting a6 (Focus point illumination, 0299). For information  
on setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,see Custom Setting  
a7 (Focus point wrap-around, 0299). For information on choosing  
the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi  
selector, see Custom Setting a8 (AF point selection, 0300). For  
information on choosing the role of the B button for vertical  
shooting, see Custom Setting a10 (Vertical AF-ON button, 0301). For  
information on changing the role of the multi selector center button,  
see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector center button, 0314).  
N
95  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,  
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus  
point in the final composition. It can also be used when the  
autofocus system is unable to focus (098).  
1 Focus.  
Position the subject in the selected focus  
point and press the shutter-release  
button halfway to initiate focus.  
2 Check that the in-focus indicator  
(I) appears in the viewfinder.  
N
Single-servo AF  
Focus will lock automatically  
when the in-focus indicator  
appears, and remain locked  
until you remove your finger  
from the shutter-release  
button. Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE-L/AF-L  
button (see following page).  
A Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button  
AE-L; 0305), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway.  
96  
Continuous-servo AF  
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both  
focus and exposure (an AE-L icon appears  
in the viewfinder, see page 132). Focus  
and exposure will remain locked while  
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if  
you later remove your finger from the  
shutter-release button.  
Shutter-release  
button  
N
AE-L/AF-L button  
3 Recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked  
between shots as long as the  
shutter-release button is kept  
pressed halfway, allowing several photographs in succession  
to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain  
locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the  
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus  
again at the new distance.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button, see  
Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0321).  
97  
Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed  
below. The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable  
to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator () may  
be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the  
shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. In  
these cases, use manual focus (099) or use focus lock (096) to  
focus on another subject at the same distance and then  
recompose the photograph.  
There is little or no contrast between the subject  
and the background  
Example: subject is the same color as the background.  
The focus point contains objects at different  
distances from the camera  
Example: subject is inside a cage.  
N
The subject is dominated by regular geometric  
patterns  
Example: a row of windows in a skyscraper.  
The focus point contains areas of sharply  
contrasting brightness  
Example: subject is half in the shade.  
Background objects appear larger than the subject  
Example: a building is in the frame behind the subject.  
The subject contains many fine details  
Example: a field of flowers or other subjects that are  
small or lack variation in brightness.  
98  
Manual Focus  
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus  
(non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce  
the desired results (098).  
AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.  
AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode  
switch (if present) and camera  
focus-mode selector to M.  
Focus-mode selector  
D AF Lenses  
Do not select focus mode S or C.  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could damage the camera.  
Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.  
N
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus  
ring until the image displayed on the clear  
matte field in the viewfinder is in focus.  
Photographs can be taken at any time, even  
when the image is not in focus.  
99  
The Electronic Rangefinder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6  
or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can  
be used to confirm whether the subject in  
the selected focus point is in focus (the  
focus point can be selected from any of the  
51 focus points). After positioning the  
subject in the selected focus point, press  
the shutter-release button halfway and  
rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus  
indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with  
the subjects listed on page 98, the in-focus  
indicator may sometimes be displayed  
when the subject is not in focus; confirm  
focus in the viewfinder before shooting.  
N
A Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your  
subject and the camera, measure from the  
focal plane mark (E) on the camera body.  
The distance between the lens mounting  
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm  
(1.83 in.).  
Focal plane mark  
100  
k
Release Mode  
– Single Frame, Continuous, Quiet Shutter-Release, Self-Timer, or  
Mirror Up  
Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs:  
one at a time (with or without reduced camera noise), in a  
continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with  
the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize  
vibration.  
Choosing a Release Mode....................................................102  
Continuous Mode..................................................................104  
Self-Timer Mode ....................................................................106  
Mirror up Mode......................................................................108  
k
101  
Choosing a Release Mode  
The camera supports the following release modes:  
Mode  
S
Description  
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release  
Single frame button is pressed.  
CL  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records  
Continuous  
low speed  
CH  
1–9 frames per second. *  
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records  
Continuous up to 9 frames per second (9–11 fps when DX (24×16) is  
high speed selected for Image area; see page 78). *  
As for single-frame except that noise is reduced by  
disabling beeps and minimizing sound produced when  
mirror drops back into place. Beep does not sound when  
camera focuses regardless of setting selected for Custom  
Setting d1 (Beep; 0306) and mirror does not drop back  
J
Quiet  
shutter-  
k
into place until shutter-release button is returned to  
release  
halfway position after shooting, allowing you to delay  
noise made by mirror. Mirror is quieter than in single-frame  
mode.  
E
Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused  
Self-timer by camera shake (0106).  
Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto  
or close-up photography or in other situations in which the  
MUP  
Mirror up slightest camera movement can result in blurred  
photographs (0108).  
* Average frame rate with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority  
auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other settings at default  
values, and memory remaining in memory buffer. Frame rate can be chosen  
using Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed, 0307).  
102  
To choose a release mode, press  
the release mode dial lock release  
and turn the release mode dial to  
the desired setting.  
Release mode dial lock  
release  
Release mode  
dial  
k
103  
Continuous Mode  
To take pictures in CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous  
low speed) modes:  
1 Select CH or CL mode.  
Press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the  
release mode dial to CH or CL.  
Release mode  
dial  
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
k
While the shutter-release button is  
pressed all the way down, pictures will be taken at the frame  
rate selected for Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed, 0307).  
A Continuous High Speed  
In continuous high speed mode, the maximum frame rate for FX  
(36×24) format, 1.2 ×, and 5 : 4 (30×24) images is 9 fps. The maximum  
frame rate for DX (24×16) format images can be chosen from 9, 10, and  
11 fps using Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed, 0307) >  
Continuous high-speed (note that at 10 and 11 fps, focus will be fixed  
at the value for the first shot in each burst and that, when the subject is  
poorly lit, exposure will also be fixed at the value for the first shot).  
Frame rate drops when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) or  
auto ISO sensitivity control is on.  
104  
A Buffer Size  
The approximate number of images that can  
be stored in the memory buffer at current  
settings is shown in the exposure-count  
displays in the viewfinder and top control  
panel while the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway. The illustration at right  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 85  
pictures.  
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,  
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to  
the memory card. Up to 130 photographs can be taken in succession;  
note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access  
lamp next to the memory card slot will light. Depending on shooting  
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a  
few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove  
or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the  
camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power will  
not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. If the  
battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter  
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.  
k
A See Also  
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs  
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max.  
continuous release, 0307). For information on the number of  
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 420.  
105  
Self-Timer Mode  
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-  
portraits. To use the self-timer, mount the camera on a tripod  
(recommended) or place the camera on a stable, level surface and  
follow the steps below:  
1 Select self-timer mode.  
Press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the  
release mode dial to E.  
Release mode  
dial  
2 Frame the photograph and focus.  
k
In single-servo autofocus (090),  
photographs can only be taken if the  
in-focus (I) indicator appears in the viewfinder.  
A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter  
When taking photos without your eye to  
the viewfinder, close the viewfinder  
eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering  
via the viewfinder from appearing in  
photographs or interfering with  
exposure.  
106  
3 Start the timer.  
Press the shutter-release  
button all the way down to  
start the timer. The self-timer  
lamp will start to blink. Two seconds before the photograph is  
taken, the self-timer lamp will stop blinking. The shutter will  
be released about ten seconds after the timer starts.  
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the  
release mode dial to another setting.  
k
A A  
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to  
approximately 1/5 s.  
A See Also  
For information on changing the timer duration, see Custom Setting c3  
(Self-timer, 0305). For information on setting a beep to sound during  
the timer count-down, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, 0306).  
107  
Mirror up Mode  
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera  
movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is  
recommended.  
1 Select mirror up mode.  
Press the release mode dial  
lock release and turn the  
release mode dial to MUP.  
Release mode dial  
2 Raise the mirror.  
Frame the picture, focus, and then press  
the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down to raise the mirror.  
k
D Using the Viewfinder  
Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed  
in the viewfinder while mirror is raised.  
3 Take a picture.  
Press the shutter-release button all the  
way down again to take a picture. To  
prevent blurring caused by camera  
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly, or use  
an optional remote cord (0376). The mirror lowers when  
shooting ends.  
A Mirror up Mode  
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for  
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.  
108  
S
ISO Sensitivity  
– Reacting Faster to Light  
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher  
the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,  
allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. This chapter  
describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically.  
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually....................................110  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control................................................112  
S
109  
Choosing ISO Sensitivity  
Manually  
ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 12800  
in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV  
below ISO 200 and 0.3 to 3 EV above ISO 12800 are also available  
for special situations.  
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted  
by pressing the ISO button and  
rotating the main command  
dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the control panels  
or viewfinder.  
ISO button  
Maincommand  
dial  
S
Top control panel  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
ISO sensitivity: 12800  
110  
A The ISO Sensitivity Menu  
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the  
ISO sensitivity option in the shooting menu  
(0284).  
A Hi 0.3–Hi 3  
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 3 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–3 EV  
over ISO 12800 (ISO16000–102400 equivalent). Pictures taken at these  
settings are more likely to be subject to noise (randomly-spaced bright  
pixels, fog, or lines).  
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1  
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities  
0.3–1 EV below ISO 200 (ISO 160–100 equivalent). Use for larger  
apertures when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than  
normal; in most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are  
recommended.  
A See Also  
S
For information on Custom Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value), see  
page 302. For information on using the High ISO NR option in the  
shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 291.  
111  
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity  
auto control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will  
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved  
at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted  
appropriately when the flash is used).  
1 Select ISO sensitivity  
auto control for ISO  
sensitivity settings in  
the shooting menu.  
G button  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Select ISO sensitivity settings in the shooting menu,  
highlight ISO sensitivity auto control, and press 2.  
S
2 Select On.  
Highlight On and press J (if  
Off is selected, ISO sensitivity  
will remain fixed at the value  
selected by the user).  
112  
3 Adjust settings.  
The maximum value for auto  
ISO sensitivity can be selected  
using Maximum sensitivity  
(the minimum value for auto  
ISO sensitivity is automatically  
set to ISO 200; note that if the value selected for Maximum  
sensitivity is lower than the value currently selected for ISO  
sensitivity, the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will  
be used). In exposure modes e and g, sensitivity will only be  
adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed  
selected for Minimum shutter speed (1/4000–1 s; in modes f  
and h, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at  
the shutter speed selected by the user). Slower shutter speeds  
may be used if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the  
ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity. Press  
J to exit when settings are complete.  
S
When On is selected, the viewfinder and  
rear control panel show ISO-AUTO. When  
sensitivity is altered from the value selected  
by the user, these indicators blink and the  
altered value is shown in the viewfinder and rear control panel.  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option  
in the shooting menu to reduce noise (see page 291). When a flash is  
used, the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor  
of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0311).  
Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO  
sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes  
(available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 flash units), possibly  
preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds.  
113  
S
114  
V
Exposure  
– Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure  
This section describes the options available to control exposure,  
including metering, exposure mode, exposure lock, exposure  
compensation, and bracketing.  
Metering .................................................................................116  
Exposure Mode......................................................................118  
e: Programmed Auto............................................................................120  
f: Shutter-Priority Auto .......................................................................122  
g: Aperture-Priority Auto....................................................................123  
h: Manual..................................................................................................125  
Z
Long Time-Exposures...........................................................128  
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock .....................................130  
Autoexposure (AE) Lock.......................................................132  
Exposure Compensation......................................................134  
Bracketing...............................................................................136  
115  
Metering  
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The  
following options are available:  
Method  
Description  
Recommended in most situations. Camera meters a wide  
area of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution  
of brightness, color, distance, and composition for natural  
results.  
a
3D color  
matrix II  
Camera meters entire frame but  
assigns greatest weight to 12-mm  
circle in center of viewfinder (if CPU  
lens is attached, area can be selected  
using Custom Setting b5, Center-  
Z
Center-  
weighted  
weighted area, 0304 1). Classic  
Center-weighted  
meter for portraits. 2  
area 3  
Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.)  
in diameter (approximately 1.5% of  
frame). Circle is centered on current  
focus point, making it possible to  
meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU  
Z
b
Spot  
lens is used or if auto-area AF is in  
Spot metering  
effect (092), camera will meter  
area 3  
center focus point). Ensures that  
subject will be correctly exposed,  
even when background is much  
brighter or darker. 2  
1 When non-CPU lens is attached, average for entire frame will be used if  
Average is selected for Custom Setting b5; otherwise, center-weighted  
metering for non-CPU lenses will use 12-mm circle in center of viewfinder,  
regardless of setting selected for Non-CPU lens data.  
2 For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and  
maximum aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu (0215).  
3 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder.  
116  
To choose a metering method,  
press the metering selector lock  
button and rotate the metering  
selector until the desired mode is  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
Metering selector  
Z
A Matrix Metering  
The metering method used is determined by the type of lens attached:  
Type G and D lenses: Range information is included when determining  
exposure (3D color matrix metering II).  
Other CPU lenses: Range information is not included when determining  
exposure (color matrix metering II).  
Non-CPU lenses: Color matrix metering is available if focal length and  
maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data item in  
setup menu (see page 214; center-weighted metering is used if focal  
length or aperture is not specified).  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest  
weight in center-weighted metering, see Custom Setting b5 (Center-  
weighted area, 0304). For information on making separate  
adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method, see  
Custom Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0304).  
117  
Exposure Mode  
Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed  
and aperture when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available:  
programmed auto (e), shutter-priority auto (f), aperture-priority  
auto (g), and manual (h).  
Mode  
Description  
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots  
and in other situations in which there is little time  
to adjust camera settings.  
Programmed  
auto  
(0120)  
e
f
g
h
Shutter-priority User chooses shutter speed; camera selects  
auto  
(0122)  
aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur  
motion.  
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter  
speed for best results. Use to blur background for  
portraits or bring both foreground and  
background into focus for landscape shots.  
User controls both shutter speed and aperture.  
Set shutter speed to “A” for long time-  
exposures.  
Aperture-  
priority auto  
(0123)  
Manual  
(0125)  
Z
A Lens Types  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0368), lock  
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G  
lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode g (aperture-priority  
auto) and h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode g is  
automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached (0366, 369).  
The exposure mode indicator (e or f) will blink in the top control panel  
and g will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
118  
A Depth-of-Field Preview  
To preview the effects of aperture, press and  
hold the Pv button. The lens will be stopped  
down to the aperture value selected by the  
camera (modes e and f) or the value chosen by  
the user (modes g and h), allowing depth of  
field to be previewed in the viewfinder.  
Pv button  
A Custom Setting e3—Modeling Flash  
This setting controls whether optional flash units that support the  
Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 187) will emit a modeling  
flash when the Pv button is pressed. See page 312 for more information.  
Z
119  
e: Programmed Auto  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and  
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal  
exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for  
snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the  
camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. To take  
photographs in programmed auto:  
1 Select exposure  
I button  
mode e.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until e is  
displayed in the  
viewfinder and top  
control panel.  
Main command dial  
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Z
Shutter speed: 1/320 s; aperture: f/9  
120  
A Flexible Program  
In exposure mode e, different combinations of  
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by  
rotating the main command dial while the  
exposure meters are on (“flexible program”).  
Rotate the command dial to the right for large  
apertures (small f-numbers) that blur  
background details or fast shutter speeds that  
“freeze” motion. Rotate the command dial to  
the left for small apertures (large f-numbers)  
that increase depth of field or slow shutter  
speeds that blur motion. All combinations  
produce the same exposure. While flexible  
program is in effect, an asterisk (“*”) appears in  
the top control panel. To restore default shutter  
Main command dial  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
speed and aperture settings, rotate the command dial until the asterisk  
is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.  
Z
Shutter speed: 1/2,000 s;  
aperture: f/3.5  
Shutter speed: 1/50 s;  
aperture: f/22  
A See Also  
See page 397 for information on the built-in exposure program.  
121  
f: Shutter-Priority Auto  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the  
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the  
optimal exposure. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
1 Select exposure  
I button  
mode f.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until f is  
displayed in the  
viewfinder and top  
control panel.  
Main command dial  
2 Choose a shutter speed.  
Rotate the main command dial while the  
exposure meters are on to choose a  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
shutter speed. Shutter speed can be set to  
p” or to values between 30 s (q o).  
) and 1/8,000 s (  
Z
Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving  
objects, fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion.  
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)  
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)  
Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting (0130).  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
122  
g: Aperture-Priority Auto  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera  
automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the  
optimal exposure. To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
1 Select exposure  
I button  
mode g.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until g is  
displayed in the  
viewfinder and top  
control panel.  
Main command dial  
2 Choose an aperture.  
Rotate the sub-  
command dial while the  
exposure meters are on  
to choose an aperture  
from values between  
the minimum and  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Z
Sub-command dial  
maximum for the lens. Small apertures (high f-numbers)  
increase depth of field (see page 119), bringing both  
foreground and background into focus. Large apertures (low  
f-numbers) soften background details in portraits or other  
compositions that emphasize the main subject.  
Small aperture (f/36)  
Large aperture (f/2.8)  
Aperture can be locked at the selected setting (0131).  
123  
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Z
A Non-CPU Lenses (0366, 369)  
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture.  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been  
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item  
SHOOT  
in setup menu (0215) when a non-CPU lens is  
CUSTOM  
attached, the current f-number will be  
displayed in the viewfinder and top control  
panel, rounded to the nearest full stop.  
Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops  
(F, with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must  
be read from the lens aperture ring.  
124  
h: Manual  
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and  
aperture. To take photographs in manual exposure mode:  
1 Select exposure  
I button  
mode h.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until h  
is displayed in the  
viewfinder and top  
control panel.  
Main command dial  
Z
125  
2 Choose aperture and shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command  
dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command dial to  
set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to values  
between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the shutter can be held open  
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A, 0128).  
Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and  
maximum values for the lens. Check exposure in the exposure  
indicators, and continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture  
until the desired exposure is achieved.  
Sub-command dial  
Aperture  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Z
Shutter  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
speed  
Main command dial  
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected  
setting (0130, 131).  
3 Frame a  
photograph,  
focus, and  
Shutter speed: 1/250 s;  
aperture: f/8  
shoot.  
126  
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses  
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need  
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set  
aperture.  
A Exposure Indicators  
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel show  
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current  
settings (if r or q is displayed in f or g modes, the indicators show  
the amount of under- or over-exposure). Depending on the option  
chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0302),  
the amount of under- or over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV,  
1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the exposure metering system are  
exceeded, the displays will flash.  
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV  
Top control  
panel  
Viewfinder  
Z
A Reverse Indicators  
Custom Setting f11 (Reverse indicators, 0324) can be used to reverse  
the exposure indicator display.  
127  
Long Time-Exposures  
At a shutter speed of A, the shutter will remain open while the  
shutter-release button is held down. Use for long time-exposure  
photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or  
fireworks. A tripod and optional remote cord (0376) are  
recommended to prevent blur.  
1 Ready the camera.  
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level  
surface. If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to  
the camera.  
A Long Time-Exposures  
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via  
the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering  
with exposure. Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL4a  
battery or an optional EH-6 AC adapter to prevent loss of power  
while the shutter is open. Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright  
pixels or fog) may be present in long exposures; before shooting,  
choose On for the Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu  
(0291).  
Z
2 Select exposure  
I button  
mode h.  
Press the I button  
and rotate the main  
command dial until h is  
displayed in the  
viewfinder and top  
control panel.  
Main command dial  
128  
3 Choose a shutter speed.  
While the exposure meters are active,  
rotate the main command dial until  
A” appears in the shutter-speed  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
displays. The exposure indicators do not appear when  
A“ is selected.  
4 Press the shutter-release button all the way down.  
Press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote cord  
all the way down. The shutter will remain open while the  
shutter-release button is pressed.  
5 Release the shutter-release button.  
Remove your finger from the shutter-release button to record  
the photograph.  
Z
Shutter speed: 35 s; aperture: f/25  
129  
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock  
The F button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value  
selected in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, or to  
lock aperture at the value selected in aperture-priority auto and  
manual exposure modes. Lock is not available in programmed  
auto.  
Shutter-Speed Lock  
To lock shutter speed at the selected value, press the F button and  
rotate the main command dial until F icons appear in the  
viewfinder and the top control panel.  
F button  
Main command dial  
Z
To unlock shutter speed, press the F button  
and rotate the main command dial until the  
F icons disappear from the displays.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
130  
Aperture Lock  
To lock aperture at the selected value, press the F button and  
rotate the sub-command dial until F icons appear in the  
viewfinder and the top control panel.  
F button  
Sub-command dial  
To unlock aperture, press the F button and  
rotate the sub-command dial until the F  
icons disappear from the displays.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Z
131  
Autoexposure (AE) Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering  
exposure.  
1 Select center-weighted or  
Metering selector  
spot metering (0116).  
Matrix metering will not  
produce the desired results  
with autoexposure lock. If  
using center-weighted  
metering, select the center  
focus point with the multi  
selector (094).  
2 Lock exposure.  
Shutter-release  
button  
Position the subject in the selected  
focus point and press the shutter-  
Z
release button halfway. With the  
shutter-release button pressed halfway  
and the subject positioned in the focus  
point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock  
exposure (and focus, except in manual  
focus mode). Confirm that the in-focus  
indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder.  
AE-L/AF-L button  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L  
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.  
132  
3 Recompose the  
photograph.  
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button  
pressed, recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
A Metered Area  
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a  
4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In center-  
weighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a  
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.  
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed  
without altering the metered value for exposure:  
Z
Exposure mode  
Setting  
e
f
g
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0121)  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control  
panel. Note that the metering method can not be changed while  
exposure lock is in effect (changes to metering take effect when the lock  
is released).  
A See Also  
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,  
0305), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. For information on changing the role of the AE-L/AF-L button,  
see Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0321).  
133  
Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value  
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker.  
In exposure mode h, only the exposure information shown in the  
exposure indicator is affected; shutter speed and aperture do not  
change.  
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button  
and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is  
displayed in the viewfinder or top control panel.  
E button  
Main command dial  
Z
0 EV  
–0.3 EV  
+2.0 EV  
(E button pressed)  
134  
Exposure compensation can be set to values between –5 EV  
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of  
1/3 EV. In general, choose positive values to make the subject  
brighter, negative values to make it darker.  
–1 EV  
No exposure  
compensation  
+1 EV  
At values other than 0.0, the 0 at the  
center of the exposure indicators will  
flash and a E icon will be displayed in  
the viewfinder and top control panel  
after you release the E button. The  
current value for exposure  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
compensation can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by  
pressing the E button.  
Z
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure  
compensation to 0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when  
the camera is turned off.  
A Using a Flash  
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background  
exposure and flash level.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for  
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (EV steps for exposure  
comp., 0302). For information on making adjustments to exposure  
compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4  
(Easy exposure compensation, 0303). For information on  
automatically varying exposure, white balance, or Active D-Lighting, see  
page 136.  
135  
Bracketing  
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active  
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,  
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is  
difficult to set exposure, Active D-Lighting, or white balance and  
there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each  
shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject.  
Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:  
1 Select flash or  
exposure bracketing  
for Custom Setting e4  
(Auto bracketing set)  
in the Custom Settings  
menu.  
G button  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Select Custom Setting e4  
(Auto bracketing set) in  
the Custom Settings  
menu, highlight an  
Z
option, and press J. Choose AE & flash to vary both exposure  
and flash level, AE only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to  
vary only flash level.  
136  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.  
Number of shots  
Top control panel  
D button  
Main command  
dial  
Exposure and flash  
bracketing indicator  
At settings other than zero, a M icon and exposure and  
flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the  
viewfinder and top control panel.  
Z
137  
3 Select an exposure increment.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose the exposure increment.  
Exposure increment  
Top control panel  
D button  
Sub-command  
dial  
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen  
from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. The bracketing programs with an  
increment of 1/3 EV are listed below.  
Control panel display  
No. of shots  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
0
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
+0.3/0/+0.7  
–0.3/–0.7/0  
0/+0.3  
0/–0.3  
Z
0/–0.3/+0.3  
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7  
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/  
+0.7/+1.0  
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/  
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3  
7
9
A See Also  
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see  
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., 0302). For  
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed,  
see Custom Setting e6 (Bracketing order, 0313). For information on  
choosing the role of the D button, see Custom Setting f7 (Assign BKT  
button, 0322).  
138  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot  
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications  
to exposure are added to those made with exposure  
compensation (see page 134), making it possible to achieve  
exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV.  
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator  
will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. A  
segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7  
Display after first shot  
Z
Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by:  
0 EV –1 EV +1 EV  
139  
Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero ( ) and M is no longer displayed. The program  
last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated.  
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset  
(0200), although in this case the bracketing program will not be  
restored the next time bracketing is activated.  
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting  
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing  
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the  
shutter-release button is pressed. In other modes, one shot will be  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been  
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence  
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to  
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all  
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the  
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
Z
A Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture  
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed  
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for  
ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity auto control in modes e, f,  
and g and no flash is attached, the camera will automatically vary ISO  
sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera  
exposure system are exceeded. Custom Setting e5 (Auto bracketing  
(mode M), 0313) can be used to change how the camera performs  
exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode. Bracketing  
can be performed by varying flash level together with shutter speed  
and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.  
140  
White Balance Bracketing  
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with  
a different white balance. For more information on white balance,  
see page 149.  
1 Select white balance bracketing.  
Choose WB bracketing for Custom  
Setting e4 Auto bracketing set.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.  
Number of shots  
Z
D button  
Main command  
dial  
Top control panel  
WB bracketing  
indicator  
At settings other than zero, a WB  
bracketing indicator will appear in the  
top control panel and a W icon will be  
displayed in the top and rear control panels.  
141  
3 Select a white balance increment.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is  
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.  
White balance  
increment  
D button  
Sub-command Top control panel  
dial  
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3  
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts  
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber  
(0154). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are  
listed below.  
Z
No. of White balance  
shots increment  
Control panel display  
Bracketing order (EVs)  
0
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
1
1 B  
1 A  
1 B  
1 A  
1 B / 0 / 2 B  
1 A / 2 A / 0  
0 / 1 B  
0 / 1 A  
1 A, 1 B  
1 A, 1 B  
0 / 1 A / 1 B  
0 / 2 A / 1 A / 1 B / 2 B  
0 / 3 A / 2 A / 1 A /  
1 B / 2 B / 3 B  
0/4 A/3 A/2 A/1 A/  
1 B / 2 B / 3 B / 4 B  
7
9
1 A, 1 B  
1 A, 1 B  
A See Also  
See page 155 for a definition of “mired.”  
142  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies  
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a  
different white balance. Modifications to white balance are  
added to the white balance adjustment made with white  
balance fine-tuning.  
If the number of shots in the  
bracketing program is greater than  
the number of exposures remaining,  
n and N icon will flash in the top  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
control panel, a flashing j icon will  
appear in the viewfinder as shown at  
right, and the shutter release will be  
disabled. Shooting can begin when a  
new memory card is inserted.  
Z
143  
Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The  
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-  
button reset (0200), although in this case the bracketing  
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.  
Z
A White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF  
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG  
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.  
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-  
blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0154). No  
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.  
In self-timer mode (0106), the number of copies specified in the white-  
balance program will be created each time the shutter is released.  
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the  
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have  
been recorded.  
144  
ADL Bracketing  
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For  
more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 181.  
1 Select ADL bracketing.  
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom  
Setting e4 Auto bracketing set.  
2 Choose the number of shots.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to  
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The  
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.  
Number of shots  
Z
Top control panel  
D button  
Main command  
dial  
ADL bracketing  
indicator  
At settings other than zero, a D icon and an ADL bracketing  
indicator will be displayed in the top control panel. Choose  
two shots to take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off  
and another at a selected value. Choose three to five shots to  
take a series of photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off,  
Low, and Normal (three shots), Off, Low, Normal, and High  
(four shots), or Off, Low, Normal, High, and Extra High (five  
shots). If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 4.  
145  
3 Select Active D-Lighting.  
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to  
choose Active D-Lighting.  
D button  
Sub-command  
dial  
Active D-Lighting is shown in the top control panel.  
Control panel display  
Active D-Lighting  
Auto  
Y
R
Q
P
Z
Z
Low  
Normal  
High  
Extra high  
146  
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and  
shoot.  
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot according  
to the bracketing program selected. While bracketing is in  
effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the  
top control panel. A segment will disappear from the  
indicator after each shot.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Z
147  
Canceling Bracketing  
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main  
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing  
sequence is zero. The program last in effect will be restored the  
next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled  
by performing a two-button reset (0200), although in this case  
the bracketing program will not be restored the next time  
bracketing is activated.  
Z
A ADL Bracketing  
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting  
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing  
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the  
shutter-release button is pressed. In other modes, one shot will be  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been  
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence  
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to  
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all  
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the  
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
148  
r
White Balance  
– Keeping Colors True  
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of  
the light source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in  
the color of the light source, with the result that white objects  
appear white whether seen in the shade, direct sunlight, or under  
incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in film cameras, digital  
cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images  
according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white  
balance.This chapter covers white balance settings.  
White Balance Options.........................................................150  
Fine-Tuning White Balance..................................................153  
Choosing a Color Temperature...........................................157  
Preset Manual ........................................................................158  
r
149  
White Balance Options  
For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that  
matches the light source before shooting. The following options  
are available:  
Option  
Colortemp. *  
Description  
White balance is adjusted  
3,500– automatically. For best results, use type  
8,000 K G or D lens. If optional flash fires, results  
are adjusted appropriately.  
vAuto  
J Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
3,000 K Use under incandescent lighting.  
Use with:  
I
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in  
sports venues).  
Sodium-vapor lamps 2,700 K  
Warm-white  
3,000 K • Warm-white fluorescent lights.  
3,700 K • White fluorescent lights.  
fluorescent  
White fluorescent  
Cool-white  
4,200 K • Cool-white fluorescent lights.  
fluorescent  
Day white  
fluorescent  
5,000 K • Daylight white fluorescent lights.  
Daylight fluorescent 6,500 K • Daylight fluorescent lights.  
r
High temp.  
• High color temperature light sources  
(e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).  
7,200 K  
mercury-vapor  
H Direct sunlight  
Flash  
G Cloudy  
5,200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
5,400 K Use with optional flash units.  
6,000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
8,000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
2,500– Choose color temperature from list of  
10,000 K values (0157).  
N
M Shade  
K
Choose color temp.  
Use subject, light source, or existing  
photograph as reference for white  
L Preset manual  
balance (0158).  
* All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0.  
150  
Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If  
the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance,  
choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance.  
White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and  
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is  
displayed in the rear control panel.  
Rear control panel  
WB button  
Main command dial  
A The White Balance Menu  
White balance can also be adjusted using the  
White balance option in the shooting menu  
(0284).  
A I (Fluorescent)  
r
Selecting I (Fluorescent) with the WB button and main command dial  
selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white  
balance menu (0284).  
A Studio Flash Lighting  
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large  
studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to  
Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.  
A See Also  
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto  
bracketing set, 0312), the camera will create several images each time  
the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each image,  
“bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See page  
136 for more information.  
151  
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other  
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a  
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an  
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the  
neighborhood of 5,000–5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower  
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly  
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear  
tinged with blue.  
r
152  
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in  
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast  
into an image. White balance is fine tuned using the White  
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB  
button and rotating the sub-command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
1 Select a white balance G button  
option in the shooting  
menu.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Select White balance in  
the shooting menu, then highlight a white balance option and  
press 2. If an option other than Fluorescent, Choose color  
temp., or Preset manual is selected, proceed to Step 2. If  
Fluorescent is selected, highlight a lighting type and press 2.  
If Choose color temp. is selected, highlight a color  
temperature and press 2. If Preset manual is selected,  
choose a preset as described on page 166 before proceeding.  
r
153  
2 Fine tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-  
tune white balance. White  
balance can be fine tuned on  
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and  
the green (G)–magenta (M)  
axis. The horizontal (amber-  
Coordinates Adjustment  
blue) axis corresponds to color temperature, with each  
increment equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical (green-  
magenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding  
color compensation (CC) filters.  
Green (G)  
Increase green  
Blue (B)  
Amber (A)  
Increase magenta  
Increase blue  
Magenta (M)  
Increase amber  
r
3 Press J.  
Press J to save settings and return to  
the shooting menu. If white balance  
has been fine-tuned on the A-B axis, a  
E icon will be displayed in the rear  
control panel.  
154  
A White Balance Fine Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For  
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as  
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs  
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.  
A Color Temperature Fine-Tuning  
When Choose color temp. is selected, you can  
view the color temperature while fine-tuning  
white balance.  
A “Mired”  
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in  
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color  
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much  
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by  
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of  
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is  
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:  
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired  
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired  
r
155  
The WB Button  
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset  
manual), the WB button can be used to fine-tune white balance on  
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (0154; to fine-tune white balance  
when K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on  
page 153). Six settings in both directions are available; each  
increment is equivalent to about 5 mired (0155). Press the WB  
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is  
displayed in the rear control panel. Rotating the sub-command  
dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the  
sub-command dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B).  
At settings other than 0, a E icon appears in the rear control  
panel.  
Rear control panel  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
r
156  
Choosing a Color Temperature  
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color  
temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and  
rotating the sub-command dial. The color temperature is  
displayed in the rear control panel:  
Rear control panel  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
r
D Choose Color Temperature  
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or  
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these  
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the  
selected value is appropriate.  
A The White Balance Menu  
Color temperature can also be selected in the  
white balance menu. Note that the color  
temperature with the WB button and the sub-  
command dial replaces the value selected in the  
white balance menu.  
157  
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance  
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for  
light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available  
for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under  
Direct measurement lighting that will be used in final photograph and  
white balance is measured by camera (0160).  
Copy from existing  
photograph  
White balance is copied from photo on memory  
card (0164).  
r
158  
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in  
presets d-0 through d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to  
any white balance preset (0168).  
d-0  
Stores last value measured for  
white balance (0160). This  
preset is overwritten when a  
new value is measured.  
d-1–d-4  
Store values copied from d-0 (0163).  
Store values copied  
from images on  
memory card (0164).  
r
A White Balance Presets  
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks  
(0285). A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to  
change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank  
(no warning is displayed for preset d-0).  
159  
Measuring a Value for White Balance  
1 Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will  
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard  
gray panel can be used as a reference object. In exposure  
mode h, adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows  
0 (0127).  
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).  
Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until  
L is displayed in the rear control panel.  
Rear control panel  
WB button  
Main command dial  
3 Select direct measurement mode.  
r
Release the WB button briefly and then  
press the button until the L icon in  
the rear control panel starts to flash. A  
flashing D will also appear in the top  
control panel and viewfinder. The  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
Top control panel  
displays will flash for about six seconds.  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
160  
4 Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the  
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and  
press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera  
will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset  
d-0. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be  
measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus.  
5 Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a  
value for white balance, C will flash  
in the control panels for about six  
seconds, while the viewfinder will show  
a flashing a.  
Top control panel  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
r
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the  
camera may be unable to measure  
white balance. A flashing b a will  
appear in the control panels and  
viewfinder for about six seconds. Press  
the shutter-release button halfway to  
return to Step 4 and measure white  
balance again.  
Top control panel  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
161  
6 Select preset d-0.  
If the new value for preset white balance will be used  
immediately, select preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and  
rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is displayed in the  
rear control panel.  
D Direct Measurement Mode  
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct  
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2  
(Auto meter-off delay, 0305).  
r
A Preset d-0  
The new value for white balance will be stored  
in preset d-0, automatically replacing the  
previous value for this preset (no confirmation  
dialog will be displayed). A thumbnail will be  
displayed in the preset white balance list  
(0163).  
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has  
been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance  
will be set to a color temperature of 5,200 K, the same as Direct  
sunlight). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until  
white balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the  
other presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five  
white balance values can be stored (0163).  
162  
Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4  
Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white  
balance from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1–d-4).  
1 Select L (Preset  
manual) for White  
balance in the  
G button  
shooting menu.  
Press the G button and  
select White balance in  
the shooting menu. Highlight Preset manual and press 2.  
2 Select a destination.  
Highlight the destination  
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press  
the center of the multi  
selector.  
3 Copy d-0 to the selected  
preset.  
r
Highlight Copy d-0 and press  
J. If comment has been  
created for d-0 (0168), the  
comment will be copied to  
the comment for the selected preset.  
163  
Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)  
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an  
existing photograph to a selected preset (d-1–d-4 only). Existing  
white balance values can not be copied to preset d-0.  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the  
white balance menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a destination.  
Highlight the destination  
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press  
the center of the multi selector.  
3 Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and  
press 2.  
r
164  
4 Highlight a source image.  
Highlight the source image. To  
view the highlighted image full  
frame, press the N button.  
To view images in other  
locations, press 1while pressing N  
and select the desired card and folder  
(0224).  
5 Copy white balance.  
Press the center of the multi selector to  
copy the white balance value for the  
highlighted photograph to the selected preset. If the  
highlighted photograph has a comment (0331), the  
comment will be copied to the comment for the selected  
preset.  
r
A Choosing a White Balance Preset  
Press 1to highlight the current white balance  
preset (d-0d-4) and press 2to select another  
preset.  
165  
Selecting a White Balance Preset  
To set white balance to a preset value:  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the  
white balance menu and press  
2.  
2 Select a preset.  
Highlight the desired preset  
and press the center of the  
multi selector. To select the  
highlighted preset and display  
fine tuning menu (0154)  
without completing the next  
step, press J instead of  
pressing the center of the multi selector.  
3 Select Set.  
r
Highlight Set and press 2.  
Fine tuning menu for the  
selected white balance preset  
is displayed (0154).  
166  
A Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button  
At a setting of L (Preset manual), presets can also be selected by  
pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. The  
current preset is displayed in the rear control panel while the WB button  
is pressed.  
Rear control panel  
WB button  
Sub-command dial  
r
167  
Entering a Comment  
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to  
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.  
1 Select L (Preset manual).  
Highlight Preset manual in the  
white balance menu  
and press 2.  
2 Select a preset.  
Highlight the desired preset  
and press the center of the  
multi selector.  
3 Select Edit comment.  
Highlight Edit comment and  
press 2.  
r
4 Edit the comment.  
Edit the comment as described on page  
286.  
168  
J
Image Enhancement  
This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening, contrast,  
brightness, saturation and hue using Picture Controls, how to  
preserve detail in highlights and shadows using Active D-Lighting,  
and how to choose a color space.  
Picture Controls .....................................................................170  
Selecting a Picture Control.................................................................170  
Modifying Existing Picture Controls ...............................................172  
Creating Custom Picture Controls...................................................176  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls.....................................................179  
Active D-Lighting ..................................................................181  
Color Space.............................................................................183  
J
169  
Picture Controls  
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share  
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,  
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and  
software.  
Selecting a Picture Control  
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. Choose a  
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.  
Option  
Description  
Standard processing for balanced results.  
Recommended for most situations.  
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for  
photographs that will later be extensively  
processed or retouched.  
Q Standard  
R Neutral  
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.  
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary  
colors.  
S Vivid  
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
1 Select Set Picture  
Control in the shooting  
menu.  
G button  
J
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Set Picture  
Control in the shooting menu and press 2.  
2 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture  
Control and press J.  
170  
A Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls  
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset  
Picture Controls. Custom Picture Controls are created through  
modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture  
Control option in the shooting menu (0176). Custom Picture Controls  
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other D3S cameras  
and compatible software (0179).  
A Optional Picture Controls  
Additional optional Picture Controls are available for download from  
Nikon websites.  
A The Picture Control Indicator  
The current Picture Control is shown in the  
information display when the R button is  
pressed.  
Picture Control  
indicator  
J
171  
Modifying Existing Picture Controls  
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls  
(0176) can be modified to suit the scene or  
the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced  
combination of settings using Quick adjust,  
or make manual adjustments to individual  
settings.  
1 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight the desired Picture  
Control in the Set Picture  
Control menu (0170) and  
press 2.  
2 Adjust settings.  
Press 1or 3to highlight the  
desired setting and press 4or  
2to choose a value (0173).  
Repeat this step until all  
settings have been adjusted, or  
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of  
settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O  
button.  
J
3 Press J.  
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls  
Picture Controls that have been modified from  
default settings are indicated by an asterisk  
(“U”) in the Set Picture Control menu.  
172  
Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or  
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control  
(note that this resets all manual adjustments). For  
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes  
pictures more vivid. Not available with Neutral,  
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.  
Quick adjust  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust  
sharpening automatically according to the type of  
Sharpening scene, or choose from values between 0 (no  
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the  
sharpening).  
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to  
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3  
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in  
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct  
Contrast  
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty  
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).  
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced  
brightness. Does not affect exposure.  
Brightness  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust  
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,  
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values  
Saturation  
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).  
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make  
J
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more  
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more  
Hue  
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome  
photographs. Choose from OFF, yellow, orange, red,  
and green (0174).  
Filter  
effects  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from  
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted  
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue,  
Toning  
Purple Blue, Red Purple (0175).  
173  
D Active D-Lighting  
Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting  
(0181) is on. Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost  
when Active D-Lighting is turned on.  
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto contrast and saturation vary  
with exposure and the position of the subject in  
the frame. Use a type G or D lens for best  
results. The icons for Picture Controls that use  
auto contrast and saturation are displayed in  
green in the Picture Control grid, and lines  
appear parallel to the axes of the grid.  
A The Picture Control Grid  
Pressing the N button in Step 2 displays a  
Picture Control grid showing the contrast and  
saturation for the selected Picture Control in  
relation to the other Picture Controls (only  
contrast is displayed when Monochrome is  
selected). Release the N button to return to  
the Picture Control menu.  
A Previous Settings  
The line under the value display in the Picture  
Control setting menu indicates the previous  
value for the setting. Use this as a reference  
when adjusting settings.  
J
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on  
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:  
Option  
Description  
Y
O
R
G
Yellow  
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of  
Orange the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more  
Red  
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced  
than those produced by physical glass filters.  
174  
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Pressing 3when Toning is selected displays  
saturation options. Press 4or 2to adjust  
saturation. Saturation control is not available  
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.  
A Custom Picture Controls  
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as  
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.  
J
175  
Creating Custom Picture Controls  
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be  
modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.  
1 Select Manage Picture G button  
Control in the shooting  
menu.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Manage  
Picture Control in the shooting menu and press 2.  
2 Select Save/edit.  
Highlight Save/edit and press  
2.  
3 Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight an existing Picture  
Control and press 2, or press J  
to proceed to Step 5 to save a  
copy of the highlighted Picture  
Control without further  
J
modification.  
176  
4 Edit the selected Picture  
Control.  
See page 173 for more  
information. To abandon any  
changes and start over from  
default settings, press the O  
button. Press J when settings  
are complete.  
5 Select a destination.  
Choose a destination for the  
custom Picture Control (C-1  
through C-9) and press 2.  
6 Name the Picture  
Control.  
Keyboard  
area  
The text-entry dialog shown  
at right will be displayed. By  
default, new Picture  
Name area  
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned  
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control.  
This name can be edited to create a new name of up to 19  
characters as described on page 286.  
J
The new Picture Control will appear in  
the Picture Control list.  
177  
A Manage Picture Control > Rename  
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any  
time using the Rename option in the Manage  
Picture Control menu.  
A Manage Picture Control > Delete  
The Delete option in the Manage Picture  
Control menu can be used to delete selected  
custom Picture Controls when they are no  
longer needed.  
A The Original Picture Control Icon  
The original preset Picture Control on which the  
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by  
an icon in the top right corner of the edit  
display.  
Original Picture  
Control icon  
J
178  
Sharing Custom Picture Controls  
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility  
available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2  
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or  
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to  
the memory card to be used in other D3S cameras and compatible  
software and then deleted when no longer needed.  
To copy custom Picture Controls to or from  
the memory card, or to delete custom Picture  
Controls from the memory card, highlight  
Load/Save in the Manage Picture Control  
menu and press 2. The following options will  
be displayed:  
Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory  
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera  
and name them as desired.  
Delete from card: Delete selected  
custom Picture Controls from the  
memory card. The confirmation  
dialog shown at right will be  
displayed before a Picture Control  
is deleted; to delete the selected  
Picture Control, highlight Yes and  
J
press J.  
Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from  
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the  
memory card.  
179  
A Use Slot 1  
Slot 1 is used when saving custom Picture Controls to a memory card or  
copying custom Picture Controls to the camera. Cards in slot 2 can not  
be used.  
A Saving Custom Picture Controls  
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at  
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created  
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the  
camera (Standard, Neutral, Vivid, and Monochrome) can not be  
copied to the memory card, renamed, or deleted.  
J
180  
Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,  
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast  
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor  
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded  
subjects on a sunny day.  
Active D-Lighting off  
Active D-Lighting off  
Active D-Lighting: YAuto  
Active D-Lighting: P High  
J
D “Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”  
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure  
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting  
option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after  
shooting.  
181  
To use Active D-Lighting:  
1 Select Active  
D-Lighting in the  
shooting menu.  
G button  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Active  
D-Lighting in the  
shooting menu and press 2.  
2 Choose an option.  
Highlight the desired option  
and press J. If YAuto is  
selected, the camera will  
automatically adjust Active  
D-Lighting according to  
shooting conditions (in exposure mode h, however, YAuto  
is equivalent to Q Normal).  
D Active D-Lighting  
Matrix metering is recommended (  
J
0
116). When Active D-Lighting is on,  
uneven shading may be visible with some subjects, noise (randomly-  
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken at  
high ISO sensitivities, the capacity of the memory buffer drops, and  
additional time is required to record images. Note that Active D-Lighting  
is not available at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above. The Brightness and  
Contrast Picture Control settings (  
0
173) can not be adjusted while  
Active D-Lighting is in effect.  
A See Also  
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Auto  
bracketing set, 0312), the camera varies Active D-Lighting over a  
series of shots. See page 145 for more information.  
182  
Color Space  
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color  
reproduction. Choose a color space according to how  
photographs will be processed on leaving the camera.  
Option  
W sRGB  
Description  
Choose for photographs that will be printed or  
used “as is,with no further modification.  
This color space is capable of expressing a wider  
gamut of colors than sRGB, making it the preferred  
choice for images that will be extensively  
processed or retouched.  
X Adobe RGB  
1 Select Color space in  
G button  
the shooting menu.  
To display the menus,  
press the G button.  
Highlight Color space in  
the shooting menu and  
press 2.  
2 Select a color space.  
J
Highlight the desired option  
and press J.  
183  
A Color Space  
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the  
numeric values that represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB  
color space is widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically  
used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is recommended  
when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or  
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when  
taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct  
printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other  
commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed  
using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.  
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.21 and  
DCF 2.0 compliant; applications and printers that support Exif 2.21 and  
DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space automatically. If the  
application or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0, select the  
appropriate color space manually. An ICC color profile is embedded in  
TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space, allowing  
applications that support color management to automatically select  
the correct color space. For more information, see the documentation  
provided with the application or device.  
A Nikon Software  
ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically  
select the correct color space when opening photographs created with  
this camera.  
J
184  
l
Flash Photography  
– Using Optional Flash Units  
This chapter describes how to use the camera with optional flash  
units that support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS).  
Using a Flash ..........................................................................186  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) ...................................187  
Other Flash Units ...................................................................................189  
i-TTL Flash Control.................................................................192  
Flash Modes............................................................................193  
FV Lock ....................................................................................196  
l
185  
Using a Flash  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and  
can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units  
can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described  
below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash  
units with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and  
SB-400.  
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.  
2 Mount the flash unit on the  
accessory shoe.  
See the manual provided with the flash  
unit for details.  
l
A The Sync Terminal  
A sync cable can be connected to the sync  
terminal as required. Do not connect another  
flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear-  
curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit  
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.  
186  
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved  
communication between the camera and compatible flash units  
for improved flash photography. The camera can be used with the  
following CLS-compatible flash units:  
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
Guide  
No. 3  
SB-900 1  
ISO 100 34/111  
ISO 200 48/157  
SB-800  
38/125  
53/174  
SB-600  
30/98  
42/138  
SB-400  
21/69  
30/98  
SB-R200 2  
10/33  
14/46  
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when v or N (flash) is selected for  
white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white  
balance appropriately.  
2 Controlled remotely with optional SB-900 or SB-800 flash unit or SU-800  
wireless Speedlight commander.  
3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F), SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position;  
SB-900 with standard illumination.  
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander:  
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be  
used as a commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or  
SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a  
flash.  
l
A Guide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide  
Number by the aperture. For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide  
Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35mm zoom head position); its range at an  
aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,  
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO  
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two  
(approximately 1.4).  
187  
The following features are available with the SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:  
Flash unit  
Advanced Wireless Lighting  
Commander Remote  
SB-900  
SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200  
SB-900  
SB-900  
Flash mode/feature  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash  
for digital SLR  
Auto aperture  
Non-TTL auto  
Distance-priority  
manual  
2
2
3
i-TTL  
4
6
5
5
5
AA  
A
5
5
GN  
M
RPT  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7  
FV lock  
AF-assist for multi-area AF 8  
Flash Color Information  
Communication  
REAR  
Y
Rear-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
Power zoom  
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.  
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected  
with flash unit.  
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.  
4 Selected with flash unit. Non-TTL auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens  
is attached without specifying lens data using Non-CPU lens data.  
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit. Non-TTL  
auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached without specifying  
lens data using Non-CPU lens data.  
l
6 Selected with flash unit.  
7 Select 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0311).  
8 CPU lens required.  
188  
A Modeling Illumination  
CLS-compatible flash units such as the SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 emit  
a modeling flash when the camera Pv button is pressed. This feature can  
be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview the total lighting  
effect achieved with multiple flash units. Modeling illumination can be  
turned off using Custom Setting e3 Modeling flash (0312).  
Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual  
modes. If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button  
will lock and no photographs can be taken.  
Flash unit SB-80DX,  
SB-28DX,  
SB-30,SB-27 1,  
SB-22S, SB-22,  
SB-20,  
SB-16B, SB-15  
SB-23,SB-29 2,  
SB-21B 2,  
SB-29S 2  
SB-50DX  
SB-28, SB-26,  
SB-25, SB-24  
Flash mode  
A
Non-TTL auto  
M
G
Manual  
Repeating flash  
REAR Rear-curtain sync  
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash  
unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).  
2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm).  
l
189  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit  
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR  
cameras. The D3S is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and  
12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at  
some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for  
about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at  
full power and the photograph may be underexposed. View the  
photograph in the monitor; if it is underexposed, adjust aperture, ISO  
sensitivity, or the distance to the subject and try again.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash  
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We  
recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot  
and view the results in the monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash  
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may  
produce incorrect exposure. The D3S supports power zoom with the  
following optional flash units: the SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600. Power  
zoom is not supported with other flash units.  
l
190  
D Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)  
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in  
red-eye reduction and slow sync with red-eye reduction modes, while  
the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination  
when the conditions for AF-assist illumination are met. When used with  
AF lenses with focal lengths of 17–135 mm, the SB-900 provides AF-  
assist illumination for all focus points; note, however, that autofocus is  
available only with the following focus points:  
17–19 mm  
20–105 mm  
106–135 mm  
When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24–105 mm, the SB-800,  
SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination to assist autofocus for  
the following focus points:  
24–34 mm  
35–49 mm  
50–105 mm  
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is  
limited according to sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:  
200  
400  
800  
1600  
3200  
6400  
12800  
4.8  
5.6  
6.7  
8
9.5  
11  
13  
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture  
is stopped down by half an f-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens  
is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the  
maximum aperture of the lens.  
l
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V  
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,  
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a  
Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized  
service representative for more information.  
191  
i-TTL Flash Control  
When a CLS-compatible flash unit is set to TTL, the camera  
automatically selects one of the following types of flash control:  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible  
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.  
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by  
1,005-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range  
information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for  
natural balance between main subject and ambient background  
lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance information is included  
when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can be increased  
for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum  
aperture; see 0214). Not available when spot metering is used.  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in  
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into  
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized  
at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is  
used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when  
spot metering is selected.  
l
192  
Flash Modes  
The camera supports the following flash modes:  
Flash mode  
Description  
This mode is recommended for most situations. In  
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,  
shutter speed will automatically be set to values  
between 1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8,000 to 1/60 s with Auto FP  
High-Speed Sync; 0311).  
Front-curtain  
sync  
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to  
capture both subject and background at night or under  
dim light. This mode is only available in programmed  
auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of  
tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by  
camera shake.  
Slow sync  
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash  
fires just before the shutter closes. Use to create effect of  
a stream of light behind moving objects. In  
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto, slow rear-  
curtain sync is used to capture both subject and  
background. Use of tripod is recommended to prevent  
blurring caused by camera shake.  
Rear-curtain  
sync  
In this mode (available only with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,  
and SB-400), red-eye reduction pre-flash lights for  
approximately one second before main flash. Pupils in  
subject’s eyes contract, reducing “red-eye” effect  
sometimes caused by flash. Owing to one-second  
shutter-release delay, this mode is not recommended  
with moving subjects or in other situations in which  
quick shutter response is required. Avoid moving camera  
while red-eye reduction pre-flash is lit.  
l
Red-eye  
reduction  
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for  
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.  
Available only with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 in  
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure  
modes. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent  
blurring caused by camera shake.  
Red-eye  
reduction with  
slow sync  
193  
Choosing a Flash Mode  
To choose the flash mode, press  
the M button and rotate the main  
command dial until the desired  
flash mode is selected in the top  
control panel:  
M button  
Main command  
dial  
Front-curtain sync  
Slow sync 1  
Rear-curtain sync 2  
Red-eye reduction with  
slow sync 3, 4  
Red-eye reduction 3  
1 Available only in exposure modes e and g. In modes f and h, slow sync  
becomes front-curtain sync.  
l
2 In exposure modes e and g, flash-sync mode will be set to slow  
rear-curtain sync when the M button is released.  
3 Y icon blinks if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction.  
4 Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure  
modes e and g. In modes f and h, red-eye reduction with slow sync  
becomes red-eye reduction.  
194  
A Studio Flash Systems  
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the  
correct synchronization can not be obtained.  
A Shutter Speed and Aperture  
Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when an optional flash  
unit is used:  
Mode  
Shutter speed  
Set automatically by camera  
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2  
Aperture  
See page  
e
120  
Set automatically  
by camera  
Value selected by user  
f
g
h
122  
123  
125  
(1/250 s–30 s) 2  
Set automatically by camera  
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2  
Value selected  
by user 3  
Value selected by user  
(1/250 s–30 s, A) 2  
1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain  
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.  
2 Speeds as fast as 1/8,000 s are available with optional SB-900, SB-800, and  
SB-600 flash units when 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1  
(Flash sync speed, 0311).  
3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. When setting aperture  
in exposure modes g and h, consult the table of flash ranges provided with  
optional flash unit.  
A See Also  
For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1  
(Flash sync speed, 0311). For information on choosing the slowest  
shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2  
(Flash shutter speed, 0312).  
l
195  
FV Lock  
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to  
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that  
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is  
not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted  
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV  
lock is available with CLS compatible flash units only.  
To use FV lock:  
1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button.  
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f4  
(Assign Fn button > Fn button press,  
0316).  
2 Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.  
Mount an SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, or SU-800 on the  
camera accessory shoe.  
3 Set the flash unit to TTL or AA mode.  
Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL or AA. See  
the Speedlight instruction manual for details.  
l
196  
4 Focus.  
Position the subject in the  
center of the frame and press  
the shutter-release button  
halfway to focus.  
5 Lock flash level.  
After confirming that the flash ready  
indicator (M) is displayed in the  
viewfinder, press the Fn button. The  
flash will emit a monitor preflash to  
determine the appropriate flash level.  
Flash output will be locked at this level  
and FV lock icons (P and e) will  
appear in the top control panel and  
viewfinder.  
Fn button  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
6 Recompose the photograph.  
l
7 Take the photograph.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to  
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without  
releasing FV lock.  
197  
8 Release FV lock.  
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock  
icons (P and e) are no longer displayed in the top control  
panel and viewfinder.  
A Metering  
The metering areas for FV lock are as follows:  
Flash unit  
Flash mode  
i-TTL  
Metered area  
5-mm circle in center of frame  
Area metered by flash exposure  
meter  
l
Stand-alone flash unit  
AA  
i-TTL  
AA  
A (master  
flash)  
Entire frame  
Used with other flash  
units (Advanced  
Wireless Lighting)  
Area metered by flash exposure  
meter  
A See Also  
For information on using the Pv or AE-L/AF-L button for FV lock, see  
Custom Setting f5 (Assign preview button, 0321) or Custom Setting  
f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0321).  
198  
t
Other Shooting Options  
This chapter covers restoring default settings, making multiple  
exposures, interval timer photography, and using GPS units and  
non-CPU lenses.  
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings................200  
Multiple Exposure .................................................................202  
Interval Timer Photography................................................208  
Non-CPU Lenses ....................................................................214  
Using a GPS Unit....................................................................217  
t
199  
Two-Button Reset: Restoring  
Default Settings  
The camera settings listed below can be  
restored to default values by holding the ISO  
and WB buttons down together for more  
than two seconds (these buttons are  
marked by a green dot). The control panels  
turn off briefly while settings are reset.  
ISO WB  
button button  
Option  
Default  
Option  
Default  
Off  
Focus point  
Center  
Shutter-speed  
lock  
Programmed  
auto  
Exposure mode  
Flexible program  
Bracketing  
Flash mode  
FV lock  
Off 2  
Off  
Front-curtain  
sync  
Exposure  
compensation  
Off  
Off  
AE lock hold  
Aperture lock  
Off 1  
Off  
Multiple  
exposure  
Off 3  
1 Custom Setting f6 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0321) is unaffected.  
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV  
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is  
selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.  
3 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple  
exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and  
number of shots are not reset.  
t
200  
The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only  
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu  
bank option will be reset (0285). Settings in the remaining banks  
are unaffected.  
Option  
Image quality  
Image size  
Default  
JPEG normal  
Large  
Option  
White balance  
ISO sensitivity  
Default  
Auto *  
200  
* Fine-tuning off.  
If the current Picture Control has been modified, existing settings  
for the Picture Control will also be restored.  
t
A See Also  
See page 392 for a list of default settings.  
201  
Multiple Exposure  
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures  
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can be recorded at any  
image quality setting, and produce results with colors noticeably  
better than photographs combined in an imaging application  
because they make use of RAW data from the camera image  
sensor.  
Creating a Multiple Exposure  
Note that shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be  
recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s.  
A Extended Recording Times  
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the auto  
meter-off delay using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay,  
0305). The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than  
the option selected for Custom Setting c2.  
1 Select Multiple  
exposure in the  
shooting menu.  
G button  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Multiple  
exposure in the shooting menu and press 2.  
t
202  
2 Select a mode.  
Highlight Multiple exposure  
mode and press 2.  
Highlight one of the following  
and press J:  
To take a series of multiple  
exposures, select % On  
(series). Multiple exposure  
shooting will continue until  
you select Off for Multiple  
exposure mode.  
To take one multiple exposure, select $ On (single photo).  
Normal shooting will resume automatically after you have  
created a single multiple exposure.  
To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.  
If On (series) or On (single photo) is  
selected, a n icon will be displayed in  
the top control panel.  
t
203  
3 Choose the number of  
shots.  
Highlight Number of shots  
and press 2.  
Press 1or 3to choose the  
number of exposures that will  
be combined to form a single  
photograph and press J.  
A The D Button  
If Multiple exposure is selected for  
Custom Setting f7 (Assign BKT button;  
0322), you can select the multiple  
exposure mode by pressing the D button  
and rotating the main command dial and  
the number of shots by pressing the D  
button and rotating the sub-command  
dial. The mode and number of shots are  
shown in the top control panel:  
nF appears when On (series) is selected and n when On (single  
photo) is selected; no icon appears when multiple exposure is off.  
t
204  
4 Adjust gain.  
Highlight Auto gain and press  
2.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J.  
Option  
Description  
Gain adjusted according to number of exposures  
actually recorded (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for  
2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).  
On  
Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.  
Recommended if background is dark.  
Off  
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-  
speed release modes (0102), the camera records all  
exposures in a single burst. If On (series) is selected, the  
camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the  
shutter-release button is pressed; if On (single photo) is  
selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first  
photograph. In other release modes, one photograph will be  
taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed;  
continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded (for  
information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all  
photographs are recorded, see page 206).  
t
205  
The n icon will blink until shooting  
ends. If On (single photo) is selected,  
multiple exposure shooting ends  
automatically when the multiple  
exposure is complete; if On (series) is  
selected, multiple exposure shooting will only end when Off is  
selected for multiple exposure mode. The n icon clears from  
the display when multiple exposure shooting ends.  
Interrupting Multiple Exposures  
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the  
specified number of exposures have been  
taken, select Off for multiple exposure mode.  
If shooting ends before the specified number  
of exposures have been taken, a multiple  
exposure will be created from the exposures  
that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will  
be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded.  
Note that shooting will end automatically if:  
• A two-button reset is performed (0200)  
• The camera is turned off  
• The battery is exhausted  
• Pictures are deleted  
t
206  
D Multiple Exposure  
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple  
exposure.  
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view (0404). Taking  
photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off.  
The information listed in the playback photo information display  
(including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot  
in the multiple exposure.  
If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off  
during playback or menu operations, shooting will end and a multiple  
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to  
that point.  
A Voice Memos  
The camera stores only the last voice memo created during a multiple  
exposure.  
A Interval Timer Photography  
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is  
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the  
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have  
been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting  
menu is ignored; to prevent interval timer shooting from ending before  
all exposures are taken, choose a long auto meter-off delay using  
Custom Setting c2, Auto meter-off delay, 0305). These exposures will  
then be recorded as a single photograph and interval timer shooting  
will end (if On (single photo) is selected for multiple exposure mode,  
multiple exposure shooting will also end automatically). Cancelling  
multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting.  
t
A Other Settings  
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be  
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be  
changed.  
207  
Interval Timer Photography  
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at  
preset intervals.  
D Before Shooting  
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) or mirror up (MUP) when  
using the interval timer. Before beginning interval timer photography,  
take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor.  
Remember that the camera will focus before each shot—no shots will  
be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF.  
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup  
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and  
date (034).  
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before  
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the  
battery is fully charged.  
1 Select Interval timer  
shooting in the  
G button  
shooting menu.  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Interval timer  
shooting in the shooting  
menu and press 2.  
t
2 Select a starting trigger.  
Highlight one of the following  
and press 2:  
To start shooting about 3 s after  
settings are completed, select  
Now and proceed to Step 4.  
To choose a starting time, select Start time and proceed to Step 3.  
208  
3 Choose a start time.  
Press 4or 2to highlight hours  
or minutes; press 1or 3to  
change. The starting time is  
not displayed if Now is  
selected for Choose start time.  
Press 2to continue.  
4 Choose an interval.  
Press 4or 2to highlight  
hours, minutes, or seconds;  
press 1or 3to change.  
Choose an interval longer than  
the slowest anticipated shutter  
speed. Press 2to continue.  
5 Choose the number of  
intervals and number of  
shots per interval.  
Press 4or 2to highlight  
number of intervals or number  
of shots; press 1or 3to  
change. Press 2to continue.  
t
Number of Number Total  
intervals of shots/ number of  
interval shots  
209  
6 Start shooting.  
Highlight Start > On and press  
J (to return to the shooting  
menu without starting the  
interval timer, highlight  
Start > Off and press J). The  
first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time,  
or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in  
Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all  
shots have been taken. Note that because shutter speed and  
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may  
vary from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being  
recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. If shooting  
can not proceed at current settings (for example, if a shutter  
speed of A is currently selected in manual exposure mode  
or the start time is in less than a minute), a warning will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter  
When taking photos without your eye to the  
viewfinder, close the viewfinder eyepiece  
shutter to prevent light entering via the  
viewfinder from appearing in photographs or  
interfering with exposure.  
t
D Out of Memory  
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no  
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (0212) after deleting some  
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.  
210  
A Bracketing  
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.  
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer  
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the  
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots  
specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is  
active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take  
one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies  
specified in the bracketing program.  
A During Shooting  
During interval timer photography, the Q  
icon will blink in the top control panel.  
Immediately before the next shooting interval  
begins, the shutter speed display will show the  
number of intervals remaining, and the  
aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current  
interval. At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the  
number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-  
release button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed  
and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off).  
To view current interval timer settings, select  
Interval timer shooting between shots. While  
interval timer photography is in progress, the  
interval timer menu will show the starting time,  
the shooting interval, and the number of  
intervals and shots remaining. None of these  
items can be changed while interval timer  
photography is in progress.  
t
A Using the Monitor  
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be  
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The monitor  
will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval.  
211  
Pausing Interval Timer Photography  
Interval time photography can be paused by:  
• Pressing the J button between intervals  
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and  
pressing J  
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the  
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off)  
• Selecting self-timer (E) or mirror-up (MUP) release modes  
• Pressing the a button  
To resume shooting:  
1 Choose a new starting  
trigger.  
Choose a new starting trigger  
and start time as described on  
page 208.  
2 Resume shooting.  
Highlight Start > Restart and  
press J. Note that if interval  
timer photography was paused  
during shooting, any shots  
remaining in the current  
interval will be canceled.  
t
212  
Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is  
exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by:  
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu  
• Performing a two button reset (0200)  
• Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu (0287)  
• Changing bracketing settings (0136)  
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.  
No Photograph  
Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet  
to be taken, the memory buffer or memory card is full, or the  
camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera  
focuses again before each shot).  
A Release Mode  
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the  
specified number of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high  
speed) mode, photographs will be taken at a rate of up to nine shots per  
second, or, if DX (24×16) is selected for Image area, at the frame rate  
selected for Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed; 0307) > Continuous  
high-speed. In S (single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes,  
photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2  
(Shooting speed, 0307) > Continuous low-speed; in mode J,  
camera noise will be reduced.  
t
A Shooting Menu Banks  
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks  
(0285). If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting  
menu item in the shooting menu (0287), interval timer settings will be  
reset as follows:  
• Choose start time: Now  
• Interval: 00:01':00"  
• Number of shots: 1  
• Start shooting: Off  
• Number of intervals: 1  
213  
Non-CPU Lenses  
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture),  
the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when  
using a non-CPU lens. If the focal length of the lens is known:  
• Power zoom can be used with SB-900, SB-800, and SB-600 flash  
units (available separately)  
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo  
info display  
When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:  
• The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and  
viewfinder  
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture  
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info  
display  
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the  
lens:  
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to  
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results  
with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)  
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering  
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR  
t
A Focal Length Not Listed  
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater  
than the actual focal length of the lens.  
A Zoom Lenses  
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out.  
After changing the zoom position, select new values for lens focal  
length and maximum aperture.  
214  
The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
1 Select Non-CPU lens  
data in the setup  
menu.  
G button  
Press the G button to  
display the menus.  
Highlight Non-CPU lens  
data in the setup menu and press 2.  
2 Select a lens number.  
Highlight Lens number and  
press 4or 2to choose a lens  
number between 1 and 9.  
3 Select a focal length.  
Highlight Focal length (mm)  
and press 4or 2to choose a  
focal length between 6 and  
4,000 mm.  
4 Select a maximum  
aperture.  
t
Highlight Maximum aperture  
and press 4or 2to choose a  
maximum aperture between  
f/1.2 and f/22. The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the  
combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens.  
215  
5 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J.  
The specified focal length and  
aperture will be stored under  
the chosen lens number. This  
combination of focal length  
and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens  
number using camera controls as described below.  
Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls  
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera  
control.  
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “+command  
dials” option for a camera control in the Custom Settings  
menu (0319). Non-CPU lens number selection can be  
assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f4, Assign Fn  
button, 0316), the Pv button (Custom Setting f5, Assign  
preview button, 0321), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom  
Setting f6, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 0321).  
2 Use the selected control to choose a lens number.  
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial  
until the desired lens number is displayed in the top control  
panel.  
t
Focal Maximum  
length aperture  
Lens number  
Main command dial  
216  
Using a GPS Unit  
A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal,  
allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated  
Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each  
photograph taken. The camera can be used with an optional GP-1  
GPS unit (see below; note that the GP-1 does not provide the  
compass heading), or with third-party units connected via an  
optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord (0218).  
The GP-1 GPS Unit  
The GP-1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon  
digital cameras. For information on connecting the unit, see the  
manual provided with the GP-1.  
t
217  
Other GPS Units  
Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of the  
National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format  
can be connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal using  
an MC-35 GPS adapter cord (available separately; 0376).  
Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin  
geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector.  
These devices connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub  
9-pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device.  
See the MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before turning the  
camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode (4800 baud).  
MC-35  
t
218  
The kIcon  
When the camera establishes  
communication with a GPS device, a k icon  
will be displayed in the top control panel.  
Photo information for pictures taken while  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
the k icon is displayed will include a page of GPS data (0233).  
GPS data are only recorded when the k icon is displayed; confirm  
that the k icon is displayed before shooting (a flashing k icon  
indicates that the GPS device is searching for a signal; pictures  
taken while the k icon is flashing will not include GPS data). If no  
data are received from the GPS unit for two seconds, the k icon  
will clear from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS  
information.  
A Heading  
t
The heading is only recorded if the GPS device  
is equipped with a digital compass (note that  
the GP-1 is not equipped with a compass).  
Keep the GPS device pointing in the same  
direction as the lens and at least 20cm (8 in.)  
from the camera.  
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the  
camera clock.  
219  
Setup Menu Options  
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.  
Auto meter off: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will  
turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations  
are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2  
(Auto meter-off delay; to allow the camera time to acquire  
GPS data, the delay is extended by up to one minute after  
exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on).  
This reduces the drain on the battery.  
Enable  
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is  
connected; GPS data will always be recorded.  
Disable  
Position: This item is only available if a GPS  
device is connected, when it displays the  
current latitude, longitude, altitude,  
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and  
heading (if supported) as reported by the  
GPS device.  
Use GPS to set camera clock: Select No to set the camera clock  
independently of the GPS device. Note that when Yes is  
selected, the time will automatically be adjusted according to  
the date format, time zone, and daylight savings time options  
selected in the Time zone and date menu (034, 330).  
t
220  
I
More About Playback  
– Playback Options  
This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details  
the operations that can be performed during playback.  
Full-Frame Playback..............................................................222  
Photo Information ................................................................225  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback ..............235  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom...............................237  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion ............................238  
Deleting Photographs..........................................................240  
I
221  
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back,  
press the K button. The most  
recent photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
K button  
Multi selector  
Sub-command dial  
O button  
K button  
G button  
N button  
L button  
J button  
H button  
Main command dial  
I
A Rotate Tall  
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)  
photographs in tall orientation, select On for  
the Rotate tall option in the playback menu  
(0282). Note that because the camera itself is  
already in the appropriate orientation during  
shooting, images are not rotated automatically  
during image review (0224).  
222  
To  
Use  
Description  
View  
additional  
photographs  
Press 2to view photographs in order  
recorded, 4to view photographs in  
reverse order.  
View photo  
information  
Press 1or 3to view information  
about current photograph (0225).  
View  
thumbnails  
See page 235 for more information on  
the thumbnail display.  
N +  
Zoom in on  
photograph  
See page 237 for more information on  
playback zoom.  
N +  
Delete  
images  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Press O again to delete photo (0240).  
If voice memo has not been recorded,  
voice memo will be recorded while H  
button is pressed. If voice memo has  
been recorded, pressing H button will  
start playback (0246).  
O
H
Record/play  
voice memo  
Change  
protect  
status  
To protect image, or to remove  
protection from protected image, press  
L button (0238).  
L
View images  
in other  
locations  
Choose card and folder from which  
pictures are played back (0224).  
N +  
Return to  
shooting  
mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can  
be taken immediately.  
/
K
I
Display  
menus  
See page 273 for more information.  
G
223  
To  
Use  
Description  
If current picture is marked with 1 icon  
to show that it is a movie, pressing  
center of multi selector starts movie  
playback (073).  
Play movie  
Create edited copy of current movie  
(074).  
Edit movie  
J
A Image Review  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0281),  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting  
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not  
rotated automatically during image review). In single-frame, quiet  
shutter-release, self-timer, and mirror-up release modes, photographs  
are displayed one at a time as they are taken. In continuous release  
mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in  
the current series displayed.  
A Two Memory Cards  
Holding the N button and pressing 1in full-  
frame or thumbnail playback displays the menu  
shown at right. Highlight the desired slot and  
press 2to display a list of folders, then highlight  
a folder and press J to view the pictures in the  
selected folder. The same method can be used  
to choose a slot when selecting images for  
operations in the playback (0274) or retouch menus (0341) or when  
choosing an image as the source for preset white balance (0165).  
A See Also  
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when  
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off  
delay, 0306).  
I
The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the 1  
and 3buttons display other images and the 4and 2buttons control  
photo information. See Custom Setting f3 (Photo info/playback,  
0315) for details.  
224  
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-  
frame playback. There are up to 9 pages of information for each  
photo. Press 1or 3to cycle through photo information as shown  
below. Note that shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights  
are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display  
mode (0277; shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright  
information was recorded with the photograph as described on  
page 335). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used  
when the photo was taken.  
1
/
10  
N
I
KON  
D3S  
1
/10  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
AT I TUDE  
N
.
35  
E
º
35 971'  
LONGI TUDE  
.
139  
35  
º
43 696  
'
ALT I TUDE  
T I  
M
E
UTC  
15  
/
m04  
/
:
(
)
2009  
.
1
125 F5  
6
200  
85mm  
:
01 15 00  
:
.
HEADING  
105 17º  
AUTO 0,  
100NCD3S  
0
_
.
_
.
100NCD3S  
04  
D
S
C
0001 JP  
G
M
AL  
D
S
C
0001 JP  
G
MAL  
425N6Ox2R832  
15  
/
/
2009 10 15 00  
425N6Ox2R832  
15  
/
04  
/
2009 10 15 00  
N
I
KON  
D3S  
:
:
:
:
-
100 1  
File information  
Overview data  
GPS data  
-
100  
1
Highlights  
I
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
.
:
:
TR SP  
D
AP  
1
125  
F5  
6
ARTIST  
COPYRI GHT  
NIKON TARO  
NI KON  
E
MXP. MODE, NI SN  
O
200  
,
, EXP. TUN  
I
G
0. 0  
+1  
6
F
OCAL LE  
G
T
H
85mm  
85  
LE  
S
1. 4  
A
FN VM  
R
S
FL  
A
S
H
ODE,  
100-1  
-
-
100 1  
N
I
KON  
D3S  
100  
1
N
I
KON  
D3S  
RGB histogram  
Shooting data pages 1–3  
Shooting data page 4  
225  
File Information  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 Voice memo icon...................................246  
2 Protect status .........................................238  
3 Retouch indicator .................................341  
4 Focus point 1, 2.......................................... 94  
5 AF-area brackets 1 .............................41, 59  
6 Frame number/total number of frames  
7 Image quality........................................... 83  
8 Image size................................................. 86  
9 Image area 3.............................................. 78  
10 Image authentication ..........................334  
11 Time of recording.................................... 34  
12 Date of recording.................................... 34  
13 Slot number.............................................. 37  
14 Folder name ...........................................288  
15 File name.................................................290  
1/  
10  
15  
14  
13  
_
.
100NCD3S  
D
S
C
0001 JP  
G
M
AL  
7
:
:
15  
/
04  
/
2009 10 15 00  
425N6Ox2R832  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode (0277).  
2 If photograph was taken in focus mode S, display shows point where focus first locked.  
In focus mode C, focus point is only displayed if single-point or dynamic area was  
selected for AF-area mode and camera was able to focus.  
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24 ×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the  
Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
I
226  
Highlights 1  
1
2
3
4
5
1 Voice memo icon..................................246  
2 Protect status ........................................238  
3 Retouch indicator.................................341  
4 Image highlights 2  
-
1
100  
5 Folder number–frame number 3 ......288  
6 Highlight display indicator ................277  
7 Current channel 2  
6
7
1
2
Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode (0277).  
Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be  
N button  
overexposed) for current channel. Press 4or 2  
while pressing N button to cycle through channels  
as follows:  
RGB  
(all channels)  
R
(red)  
G
B
(green)  
(blue)  
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the  
Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
I
227  
RGB Histogram 1  
5 White balance........................................150  
Color temperature ................................157  
White balance fine-tuning .................153  
Preset manual........................................158  
8
1
9
2
10  
11  
100-  
1
6 Current channel 2  
3
4
5
6
7 Retouch indicator .................................341  
8 Histogram (RGB channel) 4. In all  
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel  
brightness, vertical axis number of  
pixels.  
7
9 Histogram (red channel) 4  
10 Histogram (green channel) 4  
11 Histogram (blue channel) 4  
1 Image highlights 2  
2 Folder number–frame number 3 ...... 288  
3 Voice memo icon.................................. 246  
4 Protect status ........................................ 238  
1
2
Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (0277).  
Blinking areas indicate highlights (areas that may be  
N button  
overexposed) for current channel. Press 4or 2  
while pressing N button to cycle through channels  
as follows:  
RGB  
R
G
B
(all channels)  
(red)  
(green)  
(blue)  
Highlight display off  
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24 ×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the  
Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
I
228  
4
Some sample histograms are shown below:  
If the image contains objects with a wide  
range of brightnesses, the distribution of  
tones will be relatively even.  
If the image is dark, tone distribution will  
be shifted to the left.  
If the image is bright, tone distribution  
will be shifted to the right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while  
decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can  
provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it  
difficult to see photographs in the monitor.  
A Playback Zoom  
To display an RGB histogram for the area visible  
in the monitor, press the  
main command dial to the right, and then  
release the button. Use the multi selector to  
view other areas of the image; to zoom out, press  
the button and rotate the main command  
N
button, rotate the  
I
N
N
dial to the left.  
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from  
those displayed in imaging applications.  
229  
Shooting Data Page 1 1  
3
5 Exposure mode......................................118  
1
2
ISO sensitivity 2 ......................................110  
,
,
D
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
.
,
.
TR SP  
AP  
1
8000 F2  
8
MXP. MODE, NI SN  
O
Hi 0 3  
4
5
6 Exposure compensation .....................134  
.
E
+
+
5
, EXP. TUN  
I
G
1mm3,  
6
Optimal exposure tuning 3 .................304  
6
F
OCAL LE  
G
T
H
85  
85  
C
7
LE  
S
1. 4  
FN VM  
R
8
A
9
7 Focal length............................................370  
8 Lens data.................................................214  
+ .  
1
FL  
A
S
H
O
D
E,  
,
,
OptionaWl TTL  
0
10  
SL  
O
9 Focus mode.............................................. 90  
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 4..........366  
-
100 1  
N
I
KON  
D3S  
11  
12 13  
10 Flash mode .............................................193  
Flash compensation  
Commander mode 5  
1 Voice memo icon.................................. 246  
2 Protect status ........................................ 238  
3 Retouch indicator................................. 341  
4 Metering method................................. 116  
Shutter speed .............................. 122, 126  
Aperture ........................................ 123, 126  
11 Camera name  
12 Image area 6.............................................. 78  
13 Folder number–frame number 6 .......288  
1
2
3
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0277).  
Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
Displayed if Custom Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, 0304) has been set to  
a value other than zero for any metering method.  
4
5
6
Displayed only if VR lens is attached.  
Displayed only if optional flash unit (SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200) is used.  
Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for  
the Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
I
230  
Shooting Data Page 2 1  
1
2
3
5 Color space .............................................183  
6 Picture Control.......................................170  
.
:
:
4
5
W
HITE  
B
A
L
AUTO  
,
0, 0  
7 Quick adjust 2 .........................................173  
CO  
PI  
L
OR  
SPAC  
E
s
RGB  
Original Picture Control 3 ....................170  
6
C
TURE  
C
TRL : ST  
A
N
D
ARD  
7
QUICK ADJUST  
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
3
0
0
0
0
8
S
H
A
RPE  
N
ING  
ST  
ESS  
TI  
8 Sharpening.............................................173  
9 Contrast...................................................173  
10 Brightness...............................................173  
9
CO  
BRI  
TUR  
N
TR  
A
10  
11  
12  
G
H
T
N
SA  
A
O
N
H
UE  
11 Saturation 4.............................................173  
-
1
N
I
KO  
N
D3S  
100  
13  
14 15  
Filter effects 5..........................................173  
12 Hue 4.........................................................173  
Toning 5....................................................173  
1 Voice memo icon.................................. 246  
2 Protect status ........................................ 238  
3 Retouch indicator................................. 341  
4 White balance ....................................... 150  
Color temperature................................ 157  
White balance fine-tuning................. 153  
Preset manual ....................................... 158  
13 Camera name  
14 Image area 6.............................................. 78  
15 Folder number–frame number 6 .......288  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0277).  
Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only.  
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.  
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.  
Monochrome Picture Controls only.  
Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for  
the Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
I
231  
Shooting Data Page 3 1  
1
2
3
3 Retouch indicator .................................341  
4 High ISO noise reduction....................291  
Long exposure noise reduction.........291  
.
:
:
:
.
N
OI SE REDUC  
HI I SO/LONG EXP  
4
5
6
7
.
-
.
ACT  
D
L IGHT  
NORMAL  
VIGNETTE CTRL NORMAL  
5 Active D-Lighting..................................181  
6 Vignette control ....................................290  
7 Retouch history .....................................341  
8 Image comment....................................331  
9 Camera name  
10 Image area 2.............................................. 78  
11 Folder number–frame number 2 .......288  
:
:
:
:
:
-
RETOUCH  
D
LMIGHT ING  
W
AR F I LTER  
CYANOTYPE  
TRI  
M
.
COMMENT  
SPRING HAS CO  
M
E
SP  
8
.
RING HAS CO  
M
E
3636  
-
1
N
I
KO  
N
D3S  
100  
9
10 11  
1 Voice memo icon.................................. 246  
2 Protect status ........................................ 238  
1
2
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0277).  
Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for  
the Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
Shooting Data Page 4 1  
1
2
3
1 Voice memo icon ..................................246  
2 Protect status.........................................238  
3 Retouch indicator .................................341  
4 Name of photographer .......................335  
5 Copyright holder...................................335  
6 Camera name  
4
5
:
:
ARTIST  
PYRI GHT  
NIKON TARO  
NI KON  
C
O
7 Image area 2.............................................. 78  
8 Folder number–frame number 2 .......288  
-
1
N
I
KO  
N
D3S  
100  
6
7
8
1
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (0277) and copyright  
information was appended to photograph (0335).  
Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for  
the Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
2
I
232  
GPS Data 1  
1
2
3
1 Voice memo icon ..................................246  
2 Protect status.........................................238  
3 Retouch indicator .................................341  
4 Latitude  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
AT I TUDE  
N
4
5
.
35  
E
º
35 971'  
LONG I TUDE  
.
139  
35  
º
43 696  
'
ALT I TUDE  
m04  
/
:
6
(
)
2009  
T I  
M
E
UTC  
15  
/
7
:
5 Longitude  
01 15 00  
:
.
HEADING  
105 17º  
8
6 Altitude  
7 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
8 Heading 2  
-
N
I
KO  
N
D3S  
100  
1
9
10 11  
9 Camera name  
10 Image area 3.............................................. 78  
11 Folder number–frame number 3 .......288  
1
2
3
Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (0217).  
Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.  
Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for  
the Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
I
233  
Overview Data  
1
2
3
4
6 Histogram showing the distribution of  
tones in the image (0229). Horizontal  
axis corresponds to pixel brightness,  
vertical axis shows number of pixels of  
each brightness in image.  
7 ISO sensitivity 1 ......................................110  
8 Focal length............................................370  
9 GPS data indicator ................................217  
10 Image comment indicator..................331  
11 Flash mode .............................................193  
12 Flash compensation  
13 Exposure compensation .....................134  
14 Metering method .................................116  
15 Exposure mode......................................118  
16 Shutter speed ...............................122, 126  
17 Aperture.........................................123, 126  
N
I
KO  
N
D3S  
1/10  
5
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
6
7
8
9
.
.
1
8000 F2  
8
H
i 0  
3
85mm  
N
+
.
1. 3  
1
0
SLOW  
AUTO 0,  
100NCD3S  
0
12  
10  
11  
_
.
D
S
C
0001 JP  
15/04/2009 10 15 00  
G
MAL  
425N6Ox2R832  
:
:
1 Frame number/total number of frames  
2 Voice memo icon.................................. 246  
3 Protect status ........................................ 238  
4 Camera name  
5 Retouch indicator................................. 341  
1
Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.  
21 Image quality........................................... 83  
22 Image size................................................. 86  
23 Image area 3.............................................. 78  
24 Image authentication indicator ........334  
25 Time of recording.................................... 34  
26 Folder name ...........................................288  
27 Date of recording.................................... 34  
28 Slot number ............................................. 37  
N
I
KO  
N
D3S  
1
/10  
18  
19  
.
.
1
8000 F2  
8
H
i 0  
3
85mm  
N
30  
+
.
1. 3  
1
0
SLOW  
29  
28  
AUTO 0,  
0
20  
_
.
100NCD3S  
D
S
C
0001 JP  
G
MAL  
425N6Ox2R832  
:
:
15  
27  
/
04  
/
2009 10 15 00  
26 25  
24 23  
22 21  
29 White balance........................................150  
Color temperature ................................157  
White balance fine-tuning .................153  
Preset manual........................................158  
18 Picture Control 2.................................... 170  
19 Active D-Lighting ................................ 181  
20 File name................................................ 290  
I
30 Color space .............................................183  
2 -- is displayed if photo was taken using optional Picture Control (0171) that is no  
longer stored in camera.  
3 Displayed in yellow if 1.2× (30×20), DX (24 ×16) or 5 : 4 (30×24) was selected for the  
Image area option (078) in the shooting menu.  
234  
Viewing Multiple Images:  
Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact  
sheets” of four, nine, or 72  
images, press the N button  
and rotate the main command  
dial.  
N button  
Main command  
dial  
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
The following operations can be performed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press N button and rotate main  
command dial to left to increase  
number of images displayed.  
Display more  
images  
N +  
Press N button and rotate main  
command dial to right to reduce  
number of images displayed. If four  
images are displayed, highlighted  
image will be displayed full frame.  
Press center of multi selector to  
switch back and forth between full  
frame and thumbnail playback.  
Use multi selector to highlight  
images for full-frame playback,  
playback zoom (0237), or deletion  
(0240).  
Display fewer  
images  
N +  
I
Toggle full  
frame playback  
Highlight  
images  
235  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press N button and rotate sub-  
command dial to scroll through  
images a page at a time.  
Page through  
images  
N +  
Delete  
highlighted  
photo  
Record/play  
voice memo  
Change protect  
status of  
See page 240 for more information.  
See page 246 for more information.  
O
H
L
See page 238 for more information.  
highlighted  
photo  
View images in  
other locations  
Choose card and folder from which  
pictures are played back (0224).  
N +  
Return to  
shooting mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs  
can be taken immediately.  
/
K
Display menus  
G
See page 273 for more information.  
I
A See Also  
For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi  
selector, see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector center button, 0314).  
236  
Taking a Closer Look:  
Playback Zoom  
Press the N button and rotate the main command dial right to  
zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame playback or on the  
image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback.  
The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press N button to  
display frame  
showing area  
N +  
currently zoomed in.  
While N button is  
pressed, main  
Zoom in  
or out  
command dial can be used to control size  
of frame—rotate dial left to zoom out,  
right to zoom 36×24 (3 : 2) format images  
in up to 27 × (large images), 20 × (medium  
images) or 13 × (small images). Release N  
button to magnify selected area to fill  
monitor.  
N +  
View  
other  
areas of  
image  
Use multi selector to view area not visible  
in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to  
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.  
N +  
View  
other  
images  
Rotate main command dial to view same  
location in other images at current zoom  
ratio.  
I
Change  
protect  
status  
L
See page 238 for more information.  
Return to  
shooting  
mode  
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be  
taken immediately.  
/
K
Display  
menus  
G
See page 273 for more information.  
237  
Protecting Photographs from  
Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L button can  
be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion.  
Protected files can not be deleted using the O button or the  
Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected images  
will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (039, 326).  
To protect a photograph:  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or  
highlight it in the thumbnail list.  
2 Press the L button.  
The photograph will be  
marked with a a icon. To  
remove protection from  
the photograph so that it  
can be deleted, display  
the photograph or  
L button  
I
highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the L  
button.  
238  
A Voice Memos  
Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos  
that may have been recorded with the images. Voice memo overwrite  
status can not be set separately.  
A Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently  
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L and O buttons  
together for about two seconds.  
I
239  
Deleting Photographs  
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or  
highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button. To delete  
multiple selected photographs or all photographs in the current  
playback folder, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once  
deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures that  
are protected or hidden can not be deleted.  
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback  
Press the O button to delete the current photograph.  
1 Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.  
2 Press the O button.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Full-frame playback Thumbnail playback  
To delete the photograph, press the O button  
again. To exit without deleting the  
photograph, press the K button.  
O button  
I
240  
A See Also  
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the  
next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted  
(0281).  
A Voice Memos  
If a voice memo has been recorded with the  
selected image, the confirmation dialog shown  
at right will be displayed when the O button is  
pressed.  
Image/sound: Select this option and press  
the O button to delete both photo and voice  
memo.  
Sound only: Select this option and press the O button to delete only  
the voice memo.  
To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo, press K.  
I
241  
The Playback Menu  
Select Delete in the playback menu to delete pictures and their  
associated voice memos. Note that depending on the number of  
images, some time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Q Selected Delete selected pictures.  
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for  
Description  
R All  
playback (0275). If two cards are inserted, you can select  
the card from which pictures will be deleted.  
Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1 Choose Selected for  
the Delete option in  
the playback menu.  
G button  
Press the G button and  
select Delete in the  
playback menu. Highlight  
Selected and press 2.  
2 Highlight a picture.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight a picture (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the N button;  
to view images in other  
locations, press 1while pressing the N button and select  
the desired card and folder as described on page 224).  
I
242  
3 Select the highlighted  
picture.  
Press the center of the multi  
selector to select the  
highlighted picture. Selected  
pictures are marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select  
additional pictures; to deselect a picture, highlight it and press  
the center of the multi selector.  
4 Press J to complete the  
operation.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; highlight Yes and  
press J.  
I
243  
I
244  
e
Voice Memos  
– Recording and Playback  
The camera is equipped with a built-in microphone, allowing voice  
memos to be added to photographs. Voice memos can be played  
back over the camera’s built-in speaker.  
Recording Voice Memos ......................................................246  
Playing Voice Memos............................................................251  
e
245  
Recording Voice Memos  
Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to  
photographs using the built-in microphone.  
Readying the Camera for Recording  
Before recording voice memos, adjust settings using the Voice  
memo options item in the setup menu.  
Voice Memo  
This option controls whether voice memos  
are recorded automatically or manually. The  
following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
7
Off  
Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.  
Selecting this option displays  
menu shown at right; select  
maximum recording time  
from 5, 10, 20, 30, 45, or 60 s.  
Unless On is selected for  
Image review in playback  
menu (0281), recording will  
On  
(Auto and  
manual)  
8
begin when shutter-release button is released after  
shooting. Recording ends when H button is pressed  
or after specified recording time has ended.  
Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph  
by pressing and holding H button (0248).  
Manual  
only  
9
e
246  
Voice Memo Overwrite  
This option controls whether the voice  
memo for the most recent photograph can  
be overwritten in shooting mode. The  
following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Voice memo can not be recorded in  
Disable shooting mode if one already exists for  
most recent image.  
Voice memo can be recorded in  
shooting mode even if one already  
Enable exists for most recent image (0248).  
Existing memo will be deleted and  
replaced by new memo.  
Voice Memo Button  
This option controls manual recording. The  
following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Voice memo is recorded while H  
button is held down. Recording  
will end automatically after 60 s.  
Recording begins when H  
Pressand  
hold  
!
Press to button is pressed and ends  
$ start/  
when H button is pressed again.  
Recording will end  
stop  
automatically after 60 s.  
A Voice Memo  
e
The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear  
control panel.  
On (auto and manual)  
Manual only  
247  
Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode)  
If On (Auto and manual) is selected for Voice memo (0246),  
a voice memo will be added to the most recent photograph when  
shooting ends. Recording will end when the H button is pressed  
or after the specified recording time has ended.  
Manual Recording (Shooting Mode)  
If On (Auto and manual) or Manual only is  
selected for Voice memo (0246), a voice  
memo can be recorded for the most recent  
photograph by pressing and holding the H  
button. A voice memo will be recorded while  
the button is held down (note that no voice  
memo will be recorded if the H button is not  
H button  
held down for at least one second).  
D Automatic Recording  
Voice memos will not be recorded automatically if On is selected for the  
Image review option (0281) in the playback menu. A voice memo can  
however be added to the photograph displayed during image review  
even if Off is selected for Voice memo.  
e
D Slot 2  
If two memory cards are inserted and Backup or RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2  
is selected for the Slot 2 option (088) in the shooting menu, voice  
memos will be associated with the images recorded to the memory card  
in slot 1.  
248  
Playback Mode  
To add a voice memo to the photograph currently displayed in  
full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list (0222,  
235):  
1 Choose a photograph.  
Display or highlight the photograph.  
Only one voice memo can be recorded  
per image; additional voice memos can  
not be recorded for images already  
marked with a h icon.  
2 Press and hold the H button.  
A voice memo will be recorded while the  
H button is held down (note that no  
voice memo will be recorded if the H  
button is not held down for at least one  
H button  
second).  
A During Recording  
During recording, the C icons in the rear  
control panel will blink. A countdown timer  
in the rear control panel shows the length of  
the voice memo that can be recorded (in  
Rear control panel  
seconds).  
e
In playback mode, a C icon is displayed in the  
monitor during recording.  
249  
A Interrupting Recording  
Recording will end automatically if:  
• The G button is pressed to display the menus  
• The K button is pressed  
• The shutter-release button is pressed halfway  
• The camera is turned off  
During interval timer photography, recording will end automatically  
about two seconds before the next photograph is taken.  
A After Recording  
If a voice memo has been recorded for the  
most recent photograph, a C icon will be  
displayed in the rear control panel.  
Rear control panel  
If a voice memo exists for the photograph  
currently selected in playback mode, a h icon  
will be displayed in the monitor.  
A Voice Memo File Names  
Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form  
xxxxnnnn.WAV,” where “xxxxnnnn” is a file name copied from the image  
with which the voice memo is associated. For example, the voice memo  
for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the file name  
“DSC_0002.WAV.” Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer.  
e
250  
Playing Voice Memos  
Voice memos can be played back over the  
camera’s built-in speaker when the  
associated image is viewed in full-frame  
playback or highlighted in the thumbnail list  
(0222, 235). The presence of a voice memo  
is indicated by an h icon.  
To  
Press  
Description  
Press H to start playback. Playback will end when H  
button is pressed again or entire memo has been  
played back.  
Start/end  
playback  
H
Confirmation dialog will be  
displayed. Press 1or 3to  
highlight option, press O to  
select.  
Image/sound: Delete both  
photo and voice memo.  
Delete  
voice  
memo  
O
Sound only: Delete voice memo  
only.  
To exit without deleting image or voice memo, press  
the K button.  
A Interrupting Playback  
Playback will end automatically if:  
e
• The G button is pressed to display the menus  
• The monitor is turned off by pressing the K button or by pressing the  
shutter-release button halfway  
• The camera is turned off  
• Another image is selected  
251  
Voice Memo Playback Options  
The Voice memo options > Audio output  
item in the setup menu controls whether  
voice memos are played back over the  
camera’s built-in speaker or by a device to  
which the camera is connected via an HDMI  
or audio/video cable. When sound is played  
back over the built-in speaker, the Audio  
output option also controls playback  
volume.  
Option  
Description  
Voice memos are played  
back over built-in speaker.  
Selecting this option  
displays menu shown at  
%
Via speaker right. Press 1or 3to  
change volume. Beep will  
sound when option is  
selected. Press J to make selection and return to  
setup menu.  
HDMI/audio-  
video output  
&
(
Audio signal output to HDMI or A/V-OUT terminal.  
Voice memos are not played back. b icon is  
displayed when photo for which voice memo exists  
is viewed in monitor.  
Off  
e
252  
Q
Connections  
– Connecting to External Devices  
This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer,  
how to print pictures, and how to view them on a television set.  
Connecting to a Computer..................................................254  
Direct USB Connection........................................................................255  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks......................................................257  
Printing Photographs...........................................................258  
Connecting the Printer ........................................................................259  
Printing Pictures One at a Time ........................................................260  
Printing Multiple Pictures...................................................................263  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set...........................................267  
Viewing Photographs on TV ...............................................269  
Standard Definition Devices..............................................................269  
High-Definition Devices......................................................................271  
Q
253  
Connecting to a Computer  
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E4 USB cable to  
connect the camera to a computer. Before connecting the camera,  
install Nikon Transfer and ViewNX from the supplied Software  
Suite CD (see the Software Installation Guide for more information).  
Nikon Transfer starts automatically when the camera is connected  
and is used to copy photographs to the computer, where they can  
be viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back  
up photographs and embed information in photographs as they  
are transferred, while ViewNX can be used to sort photographs,  
convert images to different file formats, process NEF/RAW  
photographs, and modify NEF/RAW, TIFF, and JPEG images). To  
ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera  
battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use  
or use an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately).  
Supported Operating Systems  
The supplied software can be used with computers running the  
following operating systems:  
Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 2 (Home Basic/  
Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate; runs in 32-bit  
emulation mode under 64-bit versions) and Windows XP Service  
Pack 3 (Home Edition/Professional)  
Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, or 10.5.7)  
See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on  
supported operating systems.  
Q
D Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface  
cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
254  
Direct USB Connection  
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Turn the computer on.  
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.  
3 Connect the USB cable.  
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt  
to insert the connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the  
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.  
D The USB Cable Clip  
To prevent cable from being disconnected, attach the clip as  
shown.  
Q
255  
4 Turn the camera on.  
5 Transfer photographs.  
Nikon Transfer will start automatically;  
click the Start Transfer button to  
transfer photographs (for more  
information on using Nikon Transfer,  
select Nikon Transfer help from the  
Nikon Transfer Help menu).  
Start Transfer button  
6 Turn the camera off.  
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when  
transfer is complete.  
D During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while  
transfer is in progress.  
D Close the Connector Cover  
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use.  
Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.  
Q
256  
Wireless and Ethernet Networks  
If the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter (0372) is attached,  
photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or  
Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from  
network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 (available  
separately). The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:  
Mode  
Function  
Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp  
server.  
Transfer mode  
Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before  
select mode upload.  
Control camera from computer using  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).  
PC mode  
Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network  
Print mode  
computer.  
For more information, see the WT-4 user’s manual. Be sure to  
update to the latest versions of the WT-4 firmware and supplied  
software.  
A Camera Control Pro 2  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; 0375) can be used to  
control the camera from a computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is  
running, “c” will be displayed and the exposure indicator will blink in  
the top control panel.  
A Movies  
The WT-4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send  
or Send folder is not selected for Transfer settings. Movies can not be  
uploaded in thumbnail select mode.  
Q
A WT-4A/B/C/D/E  
The principal difference between the WT-4 and WT-4A/B/C/D/E is in the  
number of channels supported; unless otherwise stated, all references  
to the WT-4 also apply to the WT-4A/B/C/D/E.  
257  
Printing Photographs  
To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via direct  
USB connection, follow the steps below.  
Take photographs  
Select photographs for printing using  
Print set (DPOF) (0267)  
Connect camera to printer (0259)  
Print photographs  
Print multiple  
Create index prints  
one at a time (0260) photographs (0263)  
(0266)  
Disconnect USB cable  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)  
(083) can not be selected for printing. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)  
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the  
retouch menu (0353).  
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection  
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter.  
When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection, set  
Color space to sRGB (0183).  
Q
A See Also  
See page 407 for information on what to do if an error occurs during  
printing.  
258  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.  
1 Turn the camera off.  
2 Connect the USB cable.  
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do  
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
D USB Hubs  
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the  
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.  
3 Turn the camera on.  
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed  
by a PictBridge playback display.  
q
w
Q
259  
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1 Select a picture.  
Press 4or 2to view additional  
pictures. Press 1or 3to view  
photo information (0225), or  
press the N button and rotate  
the main command dial right  
to zoom in on the current frame (0237). Press K to return to  
full-frame playback. To view six pictures at a time, press the  
center of the multi selector. Use the multi selector to highlight  
pictures, or press the center of the multi selector again to  
display the highlighted picture full frame. To view images in  
other locations, press 1while pressing N and select the  
desired card and folder as described on page 224.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge  
printing options.  
Q
260  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1or 3to  
choose page size (to print at  
Page size default page size for current  
printer, select Printer default),  
then press J to select and return  
to previous menu.  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1or 3to  
No. of choose number of copies  
copies (maximum 99), then press J to  
select and return to previous  
menu.  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1or 3to  
choose print style from Printer  
default (default for current  
printer), Print with border (print  
Border  
photo with white border), or No  
border, then press J to select  
and return to previous menu.  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. Press 1or 3to  
choose Printer default (default  
for current printer), Print time  
stamp (print time and date of  
Time stamp  
recording on photo), or No time  
stamp, then press J to select  
and return to previous menu.  
Q
261  
Option  
Description  
Menu shown at right will be  
displayed. To exit without  
cropping picture, highlight No  
cropping and press J. To crop  
picture, highlight Crop and press  
2.  
Cropping  
If Crop is selected, dialog shown  
at right will be displayed. Rotate  
main command dial to left to  
increase size of crop, right to  
decrease. Choose position of  
crop using multi selector and  
press J.  
A Page Size, Border, Time Stamp, and Cropping  
Choose printer default to print at current printer settings. Only  
options supported by the current printer can be selected. Note  
that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.  
4 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press  
J to start printing. To cancel  
before all copies have been  
printed, press J.  
Q
262  
Printing Multiple Pictures  
G button  
1 Display the PictBridge  
menu.  
Press the G button in the  
PictBridge playback display  
(see Step 3 on page 259).  
2 Choose Print select or Print  
(DPOF).  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press 2.  
Print select: Select pictures  
for printing.  
Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the  
Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu (0267). The  
current print order will be displayed in Step 3.  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory  
card, select Index print. See page 266 for more information.  
Q
263  
3 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll  
through the pictures on the  
memory card (to view images  
in other locations, press 1  
while pressing N and select  
the desired card and folder as  
described on page 224). To  
display the current picture full  
screen, press and hold the N  
button. To select the current  
picture for printing, press the  
L button  
L button and press 1. The picture will be marked with a Z  
icon and the number of prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L  
button pressed, press 1or 3to specify the number of prints  
(up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3when the number of  
prints is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures have been  
selected.  
4 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge  
printing options.  
Q
264  
5 Adjust printing options.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an  
option and press 2to select.  
Option  
Description  
Menu of page size options will be displayed (0261).  
Press 1or 3to choose page size (to print at default  
page size for current printer, select Printer default), then  
press J to select and return to previous menu.  
Page size  
Menu of border options will be displayed (0261). Press  
1or 3to choose print style from Printer default  
Border (default for current printer), Print with border (print  
photo with white border), or No border, then press J to  
select and return to previous menu.  
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (0261).  
Press 1or 3to choose Printer default (default for  
Time stamp current printer), Print time stamp (print time and date  
of recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J  
to select and return to previous menu.  
6 Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.  
To cancel before all copies have been printed, press  
J.  
Q
265  
Creating Index Prints  
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card,  
select Index print in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (0263).  
Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures,  
only the first 256 images will be printed.  
1 Select Index print.  
Highlight Index print in the  
PictBridge menu (0263) and  
press 2.  
The confirmation dialog shown at right  
will be displayed.  
2 Display printing options.  
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.  
3 Adjust printing options.  
Choose page size, border, and time  
stamp options as described on page 265  
(a warning will be displayed if the  
selected page size is too small).  
4 Start printing.  
Highlight Start printing and press J to  
start printing. To cancel before printing  
is complete, press J.  
Q
266  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to  
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and  
devices that support DPOF.  
1 Choose Select/set for  
the Print set (DPOF)  
item in the playback  
menu.  
G button  
Press the G button and  
select Print set (DPOF) in  
the playback menu. Highlight Select/set and press 2(to  
remove all photographs from the print order, select Deselect  
all?).  
2 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll  
through the pictures on the  
memory card (to view images in  
other locations, press 1while  
L button  
pressing N and select the desired  
card and folder as described on  
page 224). To display the current  
picture in full screen, press and hold  
the N button. To select the  
current picture for printing, press  
the L button and press 1. The  
picture will be marked with a Z  
icon and the number of prints will be set to 1. Keeping the L  
button pressed, press 1or 3to specify the number of prints  
(up to 99; to deselect the picture, press 3when the number of  
prints is 1). Press J when all the desired pictures have been  
selected.  
Q
267  
3 Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and  
press 2to toggle the highlighted  
option on or off (to complete the print  
order without including this  
information, proceed to Step 4).  
Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all  
pictures in print order.  
Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print  
order.  
4 Complete the print order.  
Highlight Done and press J  
to complete the print order.  
D Print Set  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a  
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and  
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the  
current order (0263). DPOF date and data imprint options are not  
supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of  
recording on photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge  
Time stamp option.  
The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the  
memory card to store the print order.  
Q
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW; 083) can not be  
selected for printing using this option.  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a  
computer or other device after the print order is created.  
268  
Viewing Photographs on TV  
The supplied EG-D2 audio/video (A/V) cable can be used to  
connect the D3S to a television or VCR for playback or recording. A  
type C mini-pin High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)  
cable (available separately from commercial sources) can be used  
to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.  
Standard Definition Devices  
To connect the camera to a standard television:  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or  
disconnecting the A/V cable.  
2 Connect the supplied A/V cable as shown.  
Connect to  
camera  
Audio (white)  
Video (yellow)  
Connect to  
video device  
3 Tune the television to the video channel.  
Q
269  
4 Turn the camera on and press K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed both on the  
television screen and in the camera monitor.  
A Video Mode  
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and  
that the option selected for Video mode (0329) matches the video  
standard used in the TV.  
A Television Playback  
Use of an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for  
extended playback. When the EH-6 is connected, the camera monitor-  
off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters will no  
longer turn off automatically. Note that the edges may not be visible  
when photographs are viewed on a television screen.  
A Voice Memo Options > Audio Output (0252)  
Set HDMI/audio-video output to play back or record voice memos on  
the video device.  
A Slide Shows  
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for  
automated playback (0282).  
A Audio  
When a movie with sound recorded in stereo using an external  
microphone is viewed on a television connected to the camera via an  
A/V cable, the audio output is monaural. HDMI connections support  
stereo output. Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the  
camera controls can not be used.  
Q
270  
High-Definition Devices  
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini-  
pin HDMI cable (available separately from commercial sources).  
1 Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or  
disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.  
Connect to  
camera  
Connect to high-  
definition device  
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.  
Q
271  
4 Turn the camera on and press K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-  
definition television or monitor screen; the camera monitor  
will remain off.  
A Movies  
To display or hide a guide in the monitor when viewing movies on an  
HDMI device, press the R button.  
Q
A HDMI  
At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the  
appropriate HDMI format for the high-definition device. The HDMI format  
can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu (  
0
329).  
272  
U
Menu Guide  
This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus.  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images .......................274  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options.......................284  
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings.........292  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup......................................325  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies........341  
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu..............................359  
U
273  
DThe Playback Menu:  
Managing Images  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the K  
(playback menu) tab.  
G button  
Option  
0
Delete  
242  
275  
275  
277  
278  
281  
281  
282  
282  
267  
Playback folder  
Hide image  
Display mode  
Copy image(s)  
Image review  
After delete  
Rotate tall  
Slide show  
Print set (DPOF)  
U
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 392.  
274  
G button D playback menu  
Playback Folder  
Choose a folder for playback.  
Option  
Description  
Pictures in all folders created with the D3S will be visible during  
playback.  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during  
playback.  
NCD3S  
All  
Current  
G button D playback menu  
Hide Image  
Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below. Hidden  
pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be  
deleted by formatting the memory card.  
D Protected and Hidden Images  
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the  
image.  
1 Choose Select/set.  
Highlight Select/set and  
press 2(to skip the remaining  
steps and reveal all pictures,  
highlight Deselect all? and  
press 2).  
U
275  
2 Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to scroll  
through the pictures on the  
memory card (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the N button;  
to view images in other locations, press 1while pressing N  
and select the desired card and folder as described on page  
224) and press the center of the multi selector to select the  
current picture. Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to  
deselect a picture, highlight it and press the center of the  
multi selector.  
3 Press J.  
Press J to complete the  
operation.  
U
276  
G button D playback menu  
Display Mode  
Choose the information available in the playback photo information  
display ( 225).  
0
1 Select options.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an  
option, then press 2to select  
the option for the photo  
information display. A L  
appears next to selected items;  
to deselect, highlight and press 2.  
2 Save changes and exit.  
To return to the playback  
menu, highlight Done and  
press J.  
U
277  
G button D playback menu  
Copy Image(s)  
Copy photographs from the memory card in slot 1 to the memory  
card in slot 2.  
Option  
Description  
Select image(s)  
Select photographs from memory card in slot 1.  
Select destination folder on memory card in  
slot 2.  
i
j
Select destination  
folder  
Copy selected photographs to specified  
destination.  
Copy image(s)?  
1 Choose Select image(s).  
Highlight Select image(s) and  
press 2.  
2 Select the source folder.  
Highlight the folder containing  
the images to be copied and  
press 2.  
3 Make the initial selection.  
Before going on select or  
deselect individual images, you  
can mark all or all protected  
images in the folder for  
copying by choosing Select all  
images or Select protected images. To mark only  
individually selected images for copying, choose Deselect all  
before proceeding.  
U
278  
4 Select additional images.  
Highlight pictures and press  
the center of the multi selector  
to select or deselect (to view  
the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the N  
button). Selected images are marked with a L. Press J to  
proceed to Step 5 when your selection is complete.  
5 Choose Select destination  
folder.  
Highlight Select destination  
folder and press 2.  
6 Select a destination folder.  
To enter a folder number, choose Select  
folder by number, enter the number  
(0288), and press J.  
To choose from a list of existing folders,  
choose Select folder from list, highlight  
a folder, and press J.  
U
279  
7 Copy the images.  
Highlight Copy image(s)? and  
press 2.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed; highlight Yes and  
press J. Press J again to exit  
when copying is complete.  
D Copying Images  
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination  
card. Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies.  
If the destination folder contains an  
image with the same name as one of  
the images to be copied, a  
confirmationdialogwillbedisplayed.  
Select Replace existing image to  
replace the image with the image to  
be copied, or select Replace all to  
replace all existing images with the same names without further  
prompting. To continue without replacing the image, select Skip, or  
select Cancel to exit without copying any further images. Hidden or  
protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced.  
Protect status is copied with the images but print marking (0267) is  
not. Voice memos will be copied with their associated images. Hidden  
images can not be copied.  
U
280  
G button D playback menu  
Image Review  
Choose whether pictures are automatically  
displayed in the monitor immediately after  
shooting. If Off is selected, pictures can only  
be displayed by pressing the K button.  
G button D playback menu  
After Delete  
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.  
Option  
Show  
next  
Description  
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame,  
previous picture will be displayed.  
S
Show  
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame,  
T
U
previous following picture will be displayed.  
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded,  
following picture will be displayed as described for Show  
next. If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse  
order, previous picture will be displayed as described for  
Continue  
as before  
Show previous.  
U
281  
G button D playback menu  
Rotate Tall  
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for  
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is  
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are  
not rotated automatically during image review.  
Option  
Description  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for  
display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for  
Auto image rotation (0332) will be displayed in “wide”  
(landscape) orientation.  
On  
Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”  
(landscape) orientation.  
Off  
G button D playback menu  
Slide Show  
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder  
(0275). Hidden images (0275) are not displayed.  
Option  
Start  
Description  
Start slide show.  
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.  
Display menu of voice memo playback options  
(0283).  
Audio playback  
To start the slide show, highlight Start and  
press J. The following operations can be  
performed while the slide show is in  
progress:  
U
282  
To  
Press  
Description  
Skip back/skip  
ahead  
Press 4to return to previous frame, 2to skip  
to next frame.  
View additional  
photo info  
Change photo info displayed (0225).  
Pause or resume slide show. Voice memo  
playback may continue after J button has  
been pressed.  
Pause/resume  
J
Exit to playback  
menu  
Exit to playback  
mode  
G
K
End slide show and return to playback menu.  
End slide show and exit to full-frame (0222)  
or thumbnail playback (0235).  
Exit to shooting  
mode  
Press shutter-release button halfway to return  
to shooting mode.  
The dialog shown at right is displayed when  
the show ends. Select Restart to restart or  
Exit to return to the playback menu.  
Audio Playback  
Choose On to play voice memos during slide shows. The following  
options will be displayed:  
Option  
Description  
Playback ends when next frame is displayed, even if  
entire memo has not been played.  
Frame interval  
Next frame is not displayed until entire memo has been  
played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice  
memo.  
Length of voice  
memo  
Choose Off to disable voice memo playback during slide shows.  
U
283  
C The Shooting Menu:  
Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C  
(shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
Option  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Extended menu banks  
Active folder  
File naming  
Slot 2  
Image quality  
Image size  
0
Option  
0
285 Set Picture Control  
287 Manage Picture Control  
287 Color space  
288 Active D-Lighting  
290 Vignette control  
88  
83  
86  
170  
176  
183  
181  
290  
291  
291  
110  
55,  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Image area  
78  
Live view mode  
59  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance  
85  
85  
Multiple exposure  
Movie settings  
202  
70  
208  
150 Interval timer shooting  
U
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 392.  
284  
G button C shooting menu  
Shooting Menu Bank  
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the  
exceptions of Extended menu banks, Interval timer shooting,  
Multiple exposure, and modifications to Picture Controls (quick  
adjust and other manual adjustments), changes to settings in one  
bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination  
of frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the  
camera to these settings. The new settings will be stored in the  
bank even when the camera is turned off, and will be restored the  
next time the bank is selected. Different combinations of settings  
can be stored in the other banks, allowing the user to switch  
instantly from one combination to another by selecting the  
appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,  
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename  
option (0286).  
A Shooting Menu Bank  
The top control panel and information displays  
show the current shooting menu bank.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
A See Also  
Exposure mode, shutter speed, and aperture can be included in  
shooting menu banks using the Extended menu banks option in the  
shooting menu (0287). For information on using the controls on the  
camera body to select the shooting menu bank, see Custom Setting f4  
(Assign Fn button) > Fn button + command dials (0318).  
U
285  
Renaming Shooting Menu Banks  
Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the  
list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1.  
1 Select a bank.  
Highlight the desired bank and  
press 2.  
Keyboard area  
2 Enter a name.  
To move the cursor in the name  
area, press the N button and  
press 4or 2. To enter a new  
letter at the current cursor  
position, use the multi selector  
to highlight the desired  
Name area  
character in the keyboard area  
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the  
character at the current cursor position, press the O button. To  
return to the shooting menu without changing the bank  
name, press the G button.  
Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any  
characters after the twentieth will be deleted.  
U
286  
3 Save changes and exit.  
After editing the name, press J  
to save changes and exit. The  
Shooting menu bank menu  
will be displayed.  
G button C shooting menu  
Reset Shooting Menu  
Select Yes to restore default settings for the  
current shooting menu bank. See page 392  
for a list of default settings.  
G button C shooting menu  
Extended Menu Banks  
Select On to include exposure mode, shutter  
speed (modes f and h only), and aperture  
(modes g and h only) in the information  
recorded in each of the four shooting menu  
banks, to be recalled whenever the bank is  
selected. Selecting Off restores the values in  
effect before On was selected.  
U
287  
G button C shooting menu  
Active Folder  
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.  
Select Folder by Number  
1 Select Select folder by  
number.  
Highlight Select folder by  
number and press 2. The  
dialog shown at right will be  
displayed, with the current slot  
underlined. The current slot varies with the option selected for  
Slot 2 (088).  
2 Choose a folder number.  
Press 4or 2to highlight a digit, press 1or 3to change. If a  
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y  
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:  
W : Folder is empty.  
X : Folder is partially full.  
Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered  
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.  
3 Save changes and exit.  
Press  
J
to complete the operation and return to the shooting  
menu (to exit without changing the active folder, press the  
G
button). If a folder with the specified number does not already  
exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent photographs will  
be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full.  
U
288  
Select Folder from List  
1 Choose Select folder from  
list.  
Highlight Select folder from  
list and press 2.  
2 Highlight a folder.  
Press 1or 3to highlight a folder.  
3 Select the highlighted folder.  
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the  
shooting menu (to exit without changing the active folder,  
press the G button). Subsequent photographs will be  
stored in the selected folder.  
D Folder and File Numbers  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a  
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no  
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder  
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number  
less than 999 and less than 999 images.  
A Number of Folders  
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card  
contains a very large number of folders.  
U
289  
G button C shooting menu  
File Naming  
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in  
the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC,  
followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension  
(e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used to select  
three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For  
information on editing file names, see steps 2 and 3 of “Renaming  
Shooting Menu Banks” (0286). Note that the portion of the name  
that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long.  
A Extensions  
The following extensions are used: .NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, .TIF”  
for TIFF (RGB) images, .JPG” for JPEG images, .AVI” for movies, and  
.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded  
at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images  
have the same file names but different extensions.  
G button C shooting menu  
Vignette Control  
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph.  
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses (DX  
and PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are  
most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High,  
Normal, Low, and Off.  
A Vignette Control  
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF  
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral  
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls  
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the  
desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.  
Vignette control does not apply to multiple exposures (0202), DX-  
format images (078), or images created with Image overlay (0349).  
Vignette control does not apply to movies and its effects can not be  
previewed in live view (054).  
U
290  
Long Exp. NR  
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)  
G button C shooting menu  
If On is selected, photographs taken at  
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be  
processed to reduce noise (randomly-spaced  
bright pixels or fog). The time required for  
processing is roughly equal to the current  
shutter speed; during processing, “l m”  
will blink in the shutter speed/aperture  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
displays and pictures can not be taken (if the camera is turned off  
before processing is complete, the picture will be saved but noise  
reduction will not be performed). In continuous release mode,  
frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed,  
the capacity of the memory buffer will drop.  
G button C shooting menu  
High ISO NR  
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to  
reduce noise.  
Option  
High  
Description  
Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities over ISO  
3200. While photographs are being processed, the  
capacity of the memory buffer will drop. Choose the  
amount of noise reduction performed from High,  
Normal, and Low.  
S
T Normal  
U
Low  
Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3  
and higher. The amount of noise reduction is less than  
the amount performed when Low is selected for High  
ISO NR.  
Off  
High ISO NR has no effect on movies.  
U
291  
ACustom Settings:  
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the  
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.  
G button  
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit  
individual preferences.  
Custom Setting groups  
Main menu  
B: Customsetting A: Resetcustom  
U
bank (0294)  
settings  
(0294)  
292  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Custom Setting  
Custom setting bank  
Reset custom settings  
Autofocus  
Custom Setting  
Shooting/display  
0
0
B
A
a
294  
294  
d
d3 Max. continuous release  
d4 File number sequence  
d5 Control panel/viewfinder  
d6 Information display  
d7 Screen tips  
d8 LCD illumination  
d9 Exposure delay mode  
Bracketing/flash  
e1 Flash sync speed  
e2 Flash shutter speed  
e3 Modeling flash  
e4 Auto bracketing set  
e5 Auto bracketing (Mode M)  
e6 Bracketing order  
307  
308  
309  
309  
310  
310  
310  
a1 AF-C priority selection  
a2 AF-S priority selection  
a3 Dynamic AF area  
a4 Focus tracking with lock-on 298  
a5 AF activation  
a6 Focus point illumination  
a7 Focus point wrap-around  
a8 AF point selection  
a9 AF-ON button  
295  
296  
296  
298  
299  
299  
300  
300  
301  
e
311  
312  
312  
312  
313  
313  
a10 Vertical AF-ON button  
Metering/exposure  
b1 ISO sensitivity step value  
b
302  
302  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl.  
f
Controls  
b3 EV steps for exposure comp. 302  
f1 Multi selector center button 314  
b4 Easy exposure compensation 303  
f2 Multi selector  
f3 Photo info/playback  
f4 Assign Fn button  
f5 Assign preview button  
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
f7 Assign BKT button  
f8 Customize command dials  
f9 Release button to use dial  
f10 No memory card?  
315  
315  
316  
321  
321  
322  
322  
324  
324  
324  
b5 Center-weighted area  
b6 Fine tune optimal exposure 304  
Timers/AE lock  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L 305  
304  
c
c2 Auto meter-off delay  
c3 Self-timer  
c4 Monitor off delay  
305  
305  
306  
d
Shooting/display  
d1 Beep  
d2 Shooting speed  
306  
307  
f11 Reverse indicators  
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 392. If settings in the current bank  
have been modified from default values, an asterisk will be displayed  
adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom  
Settings menu.  
U
293  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
B: Custom Setting Bank  
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to  
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a  
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of  
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new  
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned  
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.  
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other  
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination  
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,  
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename  
option as described on page 286.  
A Custom Settings Bank  
The bank letter appears in the top control panel  
and information displays.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
A: Reset Custom Settings  
Select Yes to restore default settings for the  
current Custom Settings bank. See page 393  
for a list of default settings. Custom settings  
are not reset when a two-button reset is  
performed.  
U
294  
a: Autofocus  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a1: AF-C Priority Selection  
This option controls whether  
Focus mode selector  
photographs can be taken  
whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed (release priority)  
or only when the camera is in focus  
(focus priority) in continuous-servo  
AF. To select continuous-servo AF,  
rotate the focus mode selector to C.  
Option  
Description  
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
G
Release  
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in  
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for  
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.  
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator  
(I) is displayed.  
Release +  
focus  
E
F
Focus  
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when the in-  
focus indicator (I) is displayed.  
U
295  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a2: AF-S Priority Selection  
This option controls whether  
photographs can be taken only  
when the camera is in focus (focus  
priority) or whenever the shutter-  
release button is pressed (release  
priority) in single-servo AF. To select  
single-servo AF, rotate the focus  
mode selector to S.  
Focus mode selector  
Option  
Description  
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release  
button is pressed.  
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator  
(I) is displayed.  
G
Release  
Focus  
F
Regardless of the option selected, focus will lock while the in-focus  
indicator (I) is displayed.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a3: Dynamic AF Area  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic-area  
AF (I; 092) is selected in continuous-servo AF (focus mode C;  
090), the camera will focus based on information from  
surrounding focus points. Choose the number of focus points from  
9, 21, and 51 based on subject movement (note that only active  
focus point is displayed in the viewfinder; the remaining focus  
points provide information to assist focus operation).  
Option  
Description  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will focus based on information from the  
surrounding eight focus points. Choose when there is  
time to compose the photograph or when  
photographing subjects that are moving predictably  
(e.g., runners or race cars on a track).  
c
9 points  
U
296  
Option  
Description  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will focus based on information from the  
surrounding 20 focus points. Choose when  
photographing subjects that are moving  
d 21 points  
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will focus based on information from the  
surrounding 50 focus points. Choose when  
photographing subjects that are moving quickly and  
can not be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).  
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the  
camera will use 3D-tracking to track the subject and  
select a new focus point as required. Use to quickly  
compose pictures with subjects that are moving  
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the  
subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from  
the shutter-release button and recompose the  
photograph with the subject in the selected focus  
point.  
e 51 points  
f 51 points  
(3D-tracking)  
A 3D-tracking  
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the  
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.  
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with  
subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a  
very small area of the frame.  
A See Also  
For information on using the Fn button and command dials to select the  
number of focus points for dynamic-area AF, see Custom Setting f4  
(Assign Fn button) > Fn button + command dials > Dynamic AF area  
(0319).  
U
297  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On  
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large  
changes in the distance to the subject during continuous-servo AF.  
Option  
5 (Long)  
4
Description  
C
(
D
)
E
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the  
camera waits for the specified period before adjusting  
3 (Normal) the distance to the subject. This prevents the camera  
from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by  
objects passing through the frame.  
2
1 (Short)  
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the  
distance to the subject changes. Use when  
photographing a series of subjects at varying distances  
Off  
in quick succession.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a5: AF Activation  
If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the  
shutter-release button and the B button  
can be used to initiate autofocus. If AF-ON  
only is selected, autofocus is only initiated  
when the B button is pressed.  
U
298  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a6: Focus point Illumination  
The options in this menu control whether or not the focus points  
are illuminated.  
Option  
Description  
Manual focus Choose On to display the active focus point in manual  
mode  
focus mode.  
Choose On to display the active focus point in CH  
(continuous high-speed) and CL (continuous low-speed)  
modes.  
Continuous  
mode  
Focus point Choose the brightness of the focus point display in the  
brightness viewfinder from Extra high, High, Normal, and Low.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around  
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one  
edge of the viewfinder to another.  
Option  
Wrap  
Description  
Focus-point selection “wraps around”  
from top to bottom, bottom to top,  
right to left, and left to right, so that,  
for example, pressing 2when a focus  
w
q
point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is  
highlighted (q) selects the corresponding focus point at the  
left edge of the display (w).  
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus  
No wrap points so that, for example, pressing 2when a focus point at  
the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.  
U
299  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a8: AF Point Selection  
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-  
point selection.  
Option  
Description  
Choose from the 51 focus points  
shown at right.  
B 51 points  
Choose from the 11 focus points  
A 11 points shown at right. Use for quick focus-  
point selection.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a9: AF-ON Button  
Choose the function performed when the  
B button is pressed.  
Option  
AF-ON  
Description  
A
B
Pressing the B button initiates autofocus.  
Focus and exposure lock while the B button is  
pressed.  
AE/AF lock  
C
AE lock only  
Exposure locks while the B button is pressed.  
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and  
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the button is pressed a second  
D
on release)  
time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters  
turn off.  
U
300  
Option  
Description  
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and  
E AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the button is pressed a second  
time or the exposure meters turn off.  
F
AF lock only  
Focus locks while the B button is pressed.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
a10: Vertical AF-ON Button  
Choose the function assigned to the B  
button for vertical shooting.  
Option  
Description  
Both B buttons perform the function selected  
for Custom Setting a9.  
Pressing the vertical B button initiates  
autofocus.  
Focus and exposure lock while the vertical B  
button is pressed.  
Exposure locks while the vertical B button is  
pressed.  
G
A
B
Same as AF-ON  
AF-ON  
AE/AF lock  
AE lock only  
C
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is  
AE lock (Reset on pressed, and remains locked until the button is  
D
release)  
pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or  
the exposure meters turn off.  
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is  
pressed, and remains locked until the button is  
pressed a second time or the exposure meters  
turn off.  
E AE lock (Hold)  
Focus locks while the vertical B button is  
pressed.  
F
AF lock only  
U
301  
b: Metering/Exposure  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value  
Select the increments used when making  
adjustments to ISO sensitivity (0110). If  
possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is  
maintained when the step value is changed.  
If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not  
available at the new step value, ISO  
sensitivity will be rounded to the nearest available setting.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.  
Select the increments used when making  
adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and  
bracketing.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b3: EV Steps for Exposure Comp.  
Select the increments used when making  
adjustments to exposure compensation.  
U
302  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation  
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set  
exposure compensation (0134). If On (Auto reset) or On is  
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even  
when exposure compensation is set to 0.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the  
command dials (see note below). The setting  
selected using the command dial is reset when the  
camera or exposure meters turn off (exposure  
compensation settings selected using the E button  
are not reset).  
K On (Auto reset)  
As above, except that the exposure compensation  
value selected using the command dial is not reset  
when the camera or exposure meters turn off.  
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E  
button and rotating the main command dial.  
On  
Off  
A Change Main/Sub  
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or  
On is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)  
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f8 (Customize  
command dials) > Change main/sub (0322).  
Customize command dials > Change main/sub  
Off  
On  
e
f
g
h
Sub-command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
N/A  
U
303  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b5: Center-Weighted Area  
When calculating exposure, center-weighted  
metering assigns the greatest weight to a  
circle in the center of the frame. The  
diameter (φ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12,  
15, or 20 mm or to the average of the entire  
frame.  
Note that unless Average is selected, the diameter is fixed at  
12 mm when a non-CPU lens is used, regardless of the setting  
selected for Non-CPU lens data in the setup menu (0214). When  
Average is selected, the average of the entire frame will be used for  
both CPU and non-CPU lenses.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure  
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure  
value selected by the camera. Exposure can  
be fine tuned separately for each metering  
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.  
D Fine-Tuning Exposure  
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank  
and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure  
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how  
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-  
tuning menu. Exposure compensation (0134) is preferred in most  
situations.  
U
304  
c: Timers/AE Lock  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
If Off is selected, exposure only locks when  
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. If On is  
selected, exposure will also lock when the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay  
Choose how long the camera continues to  
meter exposure when no operations are  
performed. The shutter-speed and aperture  
displays in the top control panel and  
viewfinder turn off automatically when the  
exposure meters turn off.  
Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c3: Self-Timer  
Choose the length of the shutter release  
delay in self-timer mode.  
U
305  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
c4: Monitor off Delay  
Choose how long the monitor remains on  
when no operations are performed during  
playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and  
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s)  
or when menus (Menus; defaults to 20 s) or  
information (Information display; defaults  
to 10 s) are displayed. Choose a shorter monitor-off delay for  
longer battery life. Except when image review is on, the monitor  
will remain on for about ten minutes if no operations are  
performed when the camera is powered by an optional EH-6 AC  
adapter.  
d: Shooting/Display  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d1: Beep  
If High (high pitch) or Low (low pitch) is selected, a beep will sound  
at the selected pitch while the self-timer is active or when the  
camera focuses using single-servo AF. Note that a beep will not  
sound when the camera focuses during movie recording or in  
quiet-shutter release mode (mode J) or if Release is selected for  
Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority selection, 0 296).  
c appears in the top control panel and  
information display when the beep is on.  
SHOOT  
CUSTOM  
U
306  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d2: Shooting Speed  
Choose the maximum frame advance rate for CH (continuous high-  
speed) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes. Note that the frame  
advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter  
speeds, if auto ISO sensitivity control is on, or when VR (vibration  
reduction) mode is used with VR lenses.  
Option  
Description  
In CH (continuous high-speed) mode, the frame advance  
rate for DX format (079) can be selected from 9, 10, and  
11 frames per second (fps). Regardless of the setting  
chosen, the maximum frame rate for other formats is fixed  
at 9 fps.  
Continuous  
high-speed  
Continuous Choose the frame advance rate for CL (continuous low-  
low-speed speed) mode from values between 1 and 9 fps.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d3: Max. Continuous Release  
The maximum number of shots that can be  
taken in a single burst in continuous mode  
can be set to any value between 1 and 130.  
A The Memory Buffer  
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3, shooting will  
slow when the memory buffer fills. See page 420 for more information  
on the capacity of the memory buffer.  
U
307  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d4: File Number Sequence  
When a photograph is taken, the camera  
names the file by adding one to the last file  
number used. This option controls whether  
file numbering continues from the last  
number used when a new folder is created,  
the memory card is formatted, or a new  
memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or  
a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering  
continues from the last number used or from the largest file  
number in the current folder, whichever is higher. If a  
photograph is taken when the current folder contains a  
photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be created  
automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001.  
File numbering is reset when a new folder is created, the  
memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is inserted  
On  
Off in the camera. Note that a new folder is created  
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current  
folder contains 999 photographs or a file numbered 9999.  
Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken is  
assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file  
number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file  
Reset  
J
numbering is reset to 0001.  
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999  
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release  
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.  
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d4 (File number sequence) and then  
either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.  
U
308  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d5: Control Panel/Viewfinder  
Choose the information displayed in the viewfinder and rear  
control panel.  
Option  
Description  
Choose from ISO sensitivity (9) and Exposures  
Rear control remaining (k). If Exposures remaining is selected, ISO  
panel  
sensitivity will only be displayed while the ISO button is  
pressed.  
Choose from Frame count (l) and Exposures  
remaining (k). Note that regardless of the option  
selected, memory buffer capacity will be shown while  
the shutter-release button is pressed.  
Viewfinder  
display  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d6: Information Display  
If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the  
information display (014) will automatically change from black to  
white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background.  
To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose  
Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white  
lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for  
maximum contrast with the selected text color.  
Dark on light  
Light on dark  
U
309  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d7: Screen Tips  
Choose On to display tool tips for items  
selected in the information display (017).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d8: LCD Illumination  
If Off is selected, the control panel backlights  
(LCD illuminators) will only light while the  
power switch is rotated toward  
D
. If On is  
selected, the control panels will be illuminated  
while the exposure meters are active (  
0
45).  
Select Off for increased battery life.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
d9: Exposure Delay Mode  
If Off is selected, shutter is released when the  
shutter-release button is pressed. When  
shooting with Tripod selected in live view  
mode (0  
55) or in situations where the  
slightest camera movement can blur pictures,  
On can be selected to delay shutter release  
until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed and the  
mirror is raised.  
U
310  
e: Bracketing/Flash  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e1: Flash Sync Speed  
This option controls flash sync speed.  
Option  
Description  
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,  
and SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are used, shutter  
speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a shutter  
1/250 s  
(Auto FP) speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode  
or g, auto FP high-  
e
speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is  
faster than 1/250 s.  
1/250 s1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.  
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit  
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or  
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest  
possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be  
displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel.  
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by  
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for  
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright  
sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP” when  
auto FP high-speed sync is active.  
U
311  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e2: Flash Shutter Speed  
This option determines the slowest shutter  
speed available when using front- or rear-  
curtain sync or red-eye reduction in  
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto  
exposure modes (regardless of the setting  
chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s  
in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash  
settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction  
with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e3: Modeling Flash  
If On is selected when the camera is being  
used with an optional flash unit that supports  
the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS;  
0187), the flash unit mounted on the  
camera and any CLS-compatible remote flash  
units will emit a modeling flash when the  
camera Pv button is pressed (0119). No modeling flash is emitted  
if Off is selected.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e4: Auto Bracketing Set  
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing  
(0136) is in effect. Choose AE & flash (j) to perform both  
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only  
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB  
bracketing (m) to perform white balance bracketing (0141), or  
ADL bracketing to perform bracketing using Active D-Lighting  
(0145). Note that white balance bracketing is not available at  
image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG.  
U
312  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e5: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)  
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &  
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e4 in manual  
exposure mode.  
Option  
Description  
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e4  
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level  
(Custom Setting e4 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom  
Setting e4 set to AE only) or shutter speed,  
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e4 set to  
AE & flash).  
Flash/speed  
F
G
Flash/speed/  
aperture  
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e4 set to  
Flash/aperture AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom  
H
I
Setting e4 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e4  
set to AE & flash).  
Flash only  
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If  
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used,  
ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless  
of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control (0112).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
e6: Bracketing Order  
At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), exposure, flash,  
and white balance bracketing are performed in the order  
described on pages 138 and 142. If Under>MTR>over (I) is  
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the  
highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.  
U
313  
f: Controls  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f1: Multi Selector Center Button  
This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi  
selector in shooting and playback modes (regardless of the option  
selected, pressing the center of the multi selector when a movie is  
displayed full frame starts movie playback).  
Shooting Mode  
Option  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Select center focus point.  
None.  
Select center focus point  
Not used  
J
Playback Mode  
Option  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Thumbnail on/off Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.  
n
o
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,  
View histograms a histogram is displayed while the center of the  
multi selector is pressed.  
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback  
and playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting  
from Low magnification, Medium magnification,  
and High magnification. The zoom display will  
center on the active focus point.  
Zoom on/off  
p
U
314  
Live View  
Option  
Role assigned to center of multi selector  
Select center Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view  
J
p
focus point  
selects the center focus point.  
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom  
on and off. Choose the initial zoom setting from  
Zoom on/off Low magnification, Medium magnification, and  
High magnification. The zoom display will center  
on the active focus point.  
Start movie  
recording  
Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view  
starts movie recording.  
j
Pressing the center of the multi selector has no  
effect in live view.  
Not used  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f2: Multi Selector  
If Reset meter-off delay is selected,  
operating the multi selector when the  
exposure meters are off (045) will activate  
the exposure meters. If Do nothing is  
selected, the exposure meters will not be  
activated when the multi selector is pressed.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f3: Photo Info/Playback  
If Info13/Playback42is selected, pressing  
1or 3in full-frame playback changes the  
photo information displayed, while pressing  
4or 2displays additional images. To reverse  
the role of the multi selector buttons so that  
pressing 1or 3displays additional images  
and pressing 4or 2changes the photo information displayed,  
select Info42/Playback13.  
U
315  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f4: Assign Fn Button  
Choose the role played by the Fn button,  
either by itself (Fn button press) or when  
used in combination with the command dials  
(Fn button + command dials).  
Fn Button Press  
Selecting Fn button press for Custom Setting f4 displays the  
following options:  
Option  
Description  
Preview *  
Press the Fn button to preview depth of field (0119).  
q
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units only, 0196).  
Press again to cancel FV lock.  
FV lock *  
r
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
AE/AF lock  
B
C
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and  
remains locked until the button is pressed a second  
time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters  
turn off.  
AE lock  
(Reset on  
release) *  
D
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and  
remains locked until the button is pressed a second  
time or the exposure meters turn off.  
AE lock  
(Hold) *  
E
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.  
F
s
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn  
Flash off  
button is pressed.  
U
316  
Option  
Description  
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or  
ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet  
shutter-release mode, all shots in the current  
bracketing program will be taken each time the  
Bracketing shutter-release button is pressed. If white balance  
t
burst  
bracketing is active or continuous release mode  
(mode CH or CL) is selected, the camera will repeat the  
bracketing burst while the shutter-release button is  
held down (in single frame release mode,  
photographs will be taken at about 8 fps).  
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
Matrix  
L
M
N
m
metering  
Center-  
weighted  
metering  
Spot  
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn  
button is pressed.  
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is  
pressed.  
metering  
The exposure indicators act as a tilt meter (0318).  
Press the Fn button to toggle between exposure and  
tilt meter displays.  
Virtual  
horizon *  
Fn button performs same function as K button.  
Select when using a telephoto lens or in other  
circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the K  
button with your left hand.  
Playback *  
Access top  
K
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY  
item in MY MENU.Select this option for quick access to a  
O
MENU *  
frequently-used menu item.  
No operation is performed when the Fn button is  
pressed.  
None  
* This option can not be used in combination with Fn button + command  
dials (0318). Selecting this option displays a message and sets  
Fn button + command dials to None. If another option is selected for  
Fn button + command dials while this setting is active, Fn button press  
will be set to None.  
Note that none of these options can be combined with  
U
Fn button + command dials > Dynamic AF area; see page 319.  
317  
A Virtual Horizon  
When Virtual horizon is selected for Fn button press, the exposure  
indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel can be used as a  
horizontal level. Press the Fn button to toggle between exposure and tilt  
meter displays.  
Camera tilted right  
Camera level  
Camera tilted left  
Control panel  
Viewfinder  
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at  
a sharp angle forward or back.  
Fn button + command dials  
Selecting Fn button + command dials for Custom Setting f4  
displays the following options:  
Option  
Description  
Press the Fn button and rotate  
the main command dial to  
highlight the desired image  
area (078); press 2to select  
or deselect. Highlight Done  
and press J when settings  
are complete.  
Choose  
image area  
i
U
318  
Option  
Description  
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are  
rotated, changes to shutter speed (exposure modes f  
1 step spd/ and h) and aperture (exposure modes g and h) are  
v
aperture  
made in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option  
selected for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure  
cntrl., 0302).  
Choose non- Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to  
CPU lens  
number  
choose a lens number specified using the Non-CPU  
lens data option (0214).  
w
x
Focus point- Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials for  
selection  
vertical shooting to choose a focus point.  
If this option is selected, the shooting menu bank can  
be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating a  
command dial.  
Shooting  
menu bank  
n
If continuous-servo AF (focus mode C; 090) is selected  
when dynamic-area AF (I) is chosen for AF-area mode  
(092), the number of focus points can be selected by  
Dynamic AF pressing the Fn button and rotating a command dial  
I
area  
(0296). The focus points used for dynamic-area AF are  
displayed in the viewfinder while the Fn button is  
pressed; if 51 points (3D-tracking) is selected, “3D”  
will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
No operation is performed when the command dials  
are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.  
None  
Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs  
To use the command dials to select the focus point when framing  
shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation:  
1 Choose Focus point-selection.  
Select Focus point-selection for  
Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn  
button) > Fn button + command  
dials.  
U
319  
2 Unlock the shutter-release  
button for vertical  
shooting.  
Vertical shutter-release button  
lock  
3 Select the focus point.  
With the camera in portrait (“tall”) orientation, select a focus  
point by pressing the Fn button and rotating the command  
dials for vertical shooting. Use the main command dial to  
move the focus point selection left or right, the sub-command  
dial to move it up or down.  
Main command dial for vertical shooting  
+
Fn button  
Main command dial  
for vertical shooting  
Sub-command dial for vertical shooting  
+
Fn button  
Sub-command dial  
for vertical shooting  
U
320  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f5: Assign Preview Button  
Choose the role played by the Pv button,  
either by itself (Preview button press) or  
when used in combination with the  
command dials (Preview + command dials).  
The options available are the same as for Fn  
button press (0316) and Fn button +  
command dials (0318), except that the default option for  
Preview button press is Preview and that Preview + command  
dials lacks a Focus point-selection option (the default setting for  
Preview + command dials is None).  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f6: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L  
button, either by itself (AE-L/AF-L button  
press) or when used in combination with the  
command dials (AE-L/AF-L + command  
dials). The options available for AE-L/AF-L  
button press are the same as for Fn button  
press (0316), except that AE-L/AF-L button press defaults to AE/  
AF lock and has an additional AF-ON option (if this option is  
selected, pressing the AE-L/AF-L button has the same effect as  
pressing the B button to initiate autofocus; this option can not  
be used in combination with AE-L/AF-L + command dials). The  
options available for AE-L/AF-L + command dials are the same as  
for Fn button + command dials (0318), except that AE-L/AF-L +  
command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd/aperture  
and Focus-point selection options.  
U
321  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f7: Assign BKT Button  
Choose the role played by the D button.  
Option  
Description  
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to  
choose the bracketing increment and number of shots  
in the bracketing sequence (0136).  
Auto  
bracketing  
t
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to  
choose the mode and number of shots for multiple  
exposures (0204).  
Multiple  
exposure  
$
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f8: Customize Command Dials  
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command  
dials.  
Option  
Description  
Controls the direction of the command  
dials. Choose No for normal command  
Reverse dial operation, Yes to reverse the  
rotation rotation of the command dials. This  
setting also applies to the command  
dials for vertical shooting.  
If Off is selected, the main command  
dial controls shutter speed and the  
sub-command dial controls aperture.  
If On is selected, the main command  
Change dial will control aperture and the sub-  
main/sub command dial shutter speed. If On  
(Mode A) is selected, the main  
U
command dial will be used to set aperture in exposure mode g  
only. This setting also applies to the command dials for vertical  
shooting.  
322  
Option  
Description  
If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be  
adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main  
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub). If  
Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with  
the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will  
show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G lenses  
is still set using the sub-command dial). Live view is not  
available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens with  
an aperture ring is attached. Note that regardless of the  
setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust  
aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.  
Aperture  
setting  
If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the  
picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight  
thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On is selected, the main  
command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed  
during full-frame playback, move the cursor left or right during  
Menus thumbnail playback, and move the menu highlight bar up or  
and down. The sub-command dial is used to display additional  
playback photo information in full-frame playback and to move the  
cursor up or down during thumbnail playback. While menus  
are displayed, rotating the sub-command dial right displays  
the sub-menu for the selected option, while rotating it left  
displays the previous menu. To make a selection, press 2, the  
center of the multi selector, or J.  
D Live View  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring in live view,  
select Sub-command dial for Aperture setting.  
U
323  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f9: Release Button to Use Dial  
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by  
holding the I, E, D, M, ISO, QUAL, or WB button and rotating a  
command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the  
button is released. Setting ends when any of the affected buttons  
is pressed again or the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto  
meter-off delay, setting will also end when the exposure meters  
turn off.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f10: No Memory Card?  
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when  
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded  
(they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If  
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only  
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.  
G button A Custom Settings menu  
f11: Reverse Indicators  
If  
(V) is selected, the exposure indicators in the  
top control panel and information display are displayed with  
positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select  
(W) to display negative values on the left and  
positive values on the right.  
U
324  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup  
menu) tab.  
G button  
Option  
Format memory card  
LCD brightness  
Clean image sensor  
Lock mirror up for cleaning *  
Image Dust Off ref photo  
Video mode  
Option  
0
0
326 Voice memo options  
326 Battery info  
246  
333  
257  
334  
335  
336  
220  
338  
215  
339  
340  
378 Wireless transmitter  
381 Image authentication  
327 Copyright information  
329 Save/load settings  
329 GPS  
330 Virtual horizon  
330 Non-CPU lens data  
331 AF fine tune  
HDMI  
Flicker reduction  
Time zone and date  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
331 Firmware version  
332  
*
Not available when battery is low.  
U
A See Also  
Menu defaults are listed on page 392.  
325  
G button B setup menu  
Format Memory Card  
To begin formatting, choose a memory card  
slot and select Yes. Note that formatting  
permanently deletes all pictures and other data  
on the card in the selected slot. Before  
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as  
required.  
D During Formatting  
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.  
A Two-Button Format  
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the Q (O and I)  
buttons for more than two seconds (039).  
G button B setup menu  
LCD Brightness  
Press 1or 3to choose monitor brightness.  
Choose higher values for increased  
brightness, lower values for reduced  
brightness.  
A See Also  
For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see page  
63.  
U
326  
G button B setup menu  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the  
Capture NX 2 manual).  
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is  
mounted on the camera. A non-DX lens with a focal length of at  
least 50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all  
the way in.  
1 Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J. To exit  
without acquiring image dust  
off data, press G.  
Start: The message shown at  
right will be displayed and “rEF” will  
appear in the viewfinder and top  
control panel displays.  
Clean sensor and then start: Select this  
option to clean the image sensor  
before starting. The message shown at  
right will be displayed and “rEF” will  
appear in the viewfinder and top  
control panel displays when cleaning is  
complete.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is  
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image  
sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean image sensor and  
then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with  
existing photographs.  
U
327  
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-  
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the  
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.  
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;  
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
3 Acquire dust off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to  
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off  
when the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the reference object is too bright or too  
dark, the camera may be unable to  
acquire Image Dust Off reference data  
and the message shown at right will be  
displayed. Choose another reference  
object and repeat the process from  
Step 1.  
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for  
photographs taken with different lenses or at  
different apertures. Reference images can not  
be viewed using computer imaging software.  
A grid pattern is displayed when reference  
images are viewed on the camera.  
U
328  
G button B setup menu  
Video Mode  
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the audio/  
video (A/V OUT) connector, be sure the camera video mode  
matches the device video standard (NTSC or PAL).  
G button B setup menu  
HDMI  
The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition  
Multimedia Interface) connector, allowing pictures to be played  
back on high-definition televisions or monitors using a cable with  
a type C mini-pin connector (available separately from commercial  
suppliers). Before connecting the camera to high-definition  
device, choose the HDMI format from the options below.  
Option  
v Auto  
Description  
The camera automatically selects the appropriate  
format.  
J 480p (progressive) 640 × 480 (progressive) format  
K 576p (progressive) 720 × 576 (progressive) format  
L 720p (progressive) 1,280 × 720 (progressive) format  
Photographs are displayed in 1,920 × 1,080  
M 1080i (interlaced) (interlaced) format; movies and live view are  
displayed in 1,280 × 720 format.  
The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device  
is connected.  
U
329  
G button B setup menu  
Flicker Reduction  
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting  
under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting  
during live view or movie recording. Choose  
a frequency which matches that of the local  
AC power supply.  
D Flicker Reduction  
If you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply, test both  
options and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker  
reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very  
bright, in which case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (larger  
f-number). The desired results may also not be achieved in high-  
sensitivity movie mode or during exposure preview (057). In exposure  
preview, this is due to the fact that the selected ISO sensitivity and  
shutter speed may not always be used, and flicker reduction may take  
effect if you select mode f or h and change the shutter speed.  
G button B setup menu  
Time Zone and Date  
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display  
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set  
to the time in the new time zone.  
Time zone  
Date and time Set the camera clock (034).  
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are  
displayed.  
Date format  
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will  
automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The  
default setting is Off.  
Daylight  
saving time  
B blinks in the top control panel when the clock is not set.  
U
330  
G button B setup menu  
Language  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The  
following options are available.  
Czech  
Polish  
Danish  
Portuguese  
Russian  
Finnish  
Swedish  
Turkish  
German  
English  
Spanish  
French  
Indonesian  
Italian  
Dutch  
Traditional Chinese  
Simplified Chinese  
Japanese  
Norwegian  
Korean  
G button B setup menu  
Image Comment  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.  
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0375). The comment is also  
visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information  
display (0232).  
Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 286.  
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.  
Attach comment: Select this option to  
attach the comment to all subsequent  
photographs. Attach comment can be  
turned on and off by highlighting it and  
pressing 2.  
U
331  
G button B setup menu  
Auto Image Rotation  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on  
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically  
during playback (0282) or when viewed in ViewNX (supplied) or  
in Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0375). The following  
orientations are recorded:  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90°  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counter-clockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose  
this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens  
pointing up or down.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for  
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the  
playback menu (0282). Note that because the camera itself is already  
in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated  
automatically during image review (0224).  
U
332  
G button B setup menu  
Battery Info  
View information on the battery currently  
inserted in the camera.  
Item  
Battery  
meter  
Description  
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.  
The number of times the shutter has been released with the  
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that  
the camera may sometimes release the shutter without  
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset  
white balance.  
Picture  
meter  
j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is  
required to ensure that battery level can be measured  
accurately; recalibrate battery before charging (0417).  
: Calibration not required.  
Calibration  
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that  
battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has  
reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced.  
Battery Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under  
age  
about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life;  
the battery age display will however return to normal once  
the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about  
20 °C (68 °F) or higher.  
U
333  
G button B setup menu  
Image Authentication  
Choose s On to embed image authentication information in  
new photographs as they are taken, allowing alterations to be  
detected using Nikon’s optional Image Authentication software.  
Image authentication information can not be embedded in  
existing photographs. Photographs taken with image  
authentication on are marked with a p icon on the file information  
and overview pages of the photo information display (0226, 234).  
D Camera Control Pro 2  
Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF (RGB)  
photographs recorded directly to a computer using  
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).  
A Copies  
Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created  
using the options in the retouch menu (0341).  
U
334  
G button B setup menu  
Copyright Information  
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.  
Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page  
in the photo information display (0232) and can be viewed as  
metadata in ViewNX (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available  
separately; 0375).  
Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.  
Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 286.  
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.  
Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described  
on page 286. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters  
long.  
Attach copyright information: Select this  
option to attach copyright information to  
all subsequent photographs. Attach  
copyright information can be turned on  
and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.  
D Copyright Information  
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,  
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that  
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring  
the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any  
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright  
information option.  
U
335  
G button B setup menu  
Save/Load Settings  
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory  
card in slot 1 (if the memory card is full, an error will be displayed;  
0405). Use this option to share settings among D3S cameras.  
Menu  
Option  
Display mode  
Image review  
After delete  
Playback  
Rotate tall  
Shooting menu bank  
Extended menu banks  
File naming  
Slot 2  
Image quality  
Image size  
Image area  
JPEG compression  
NEF (RAW) recording  
White balance (with fine tuning and presets d-0–d-4)  
Set Picture Control  
Color space  
Shooting  
(all banks)  
Active D-Lighting  
Vignette control  
Long exp. NR  
High ISO NR  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Live view mode  
Movie settings  
Custom settings  
(all banks)  
All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings  
U
336  
Menu  
Option  
Clean image sensor  
Video mode  
HDMI  
Flicker reduction  
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)  
Language  
Setup  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Voice memo options  
Image authentication  
Copyright information  
GPS  
Non-CPU lens data  
All My Menu items  
All recent settings  
Choose tab  
My Menu/  
Recent Settings  
Settings saved using the D3S can be restored by selecting Load  
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a  
memory card is inserted in slot 1, and that the Load settings  
option is only available if the card in slot 1 contains saved settings  
(the memory card in slot 2 can not be used to save or load  
settings).  
A Saved Settings  
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP6. The camera will not be  
able to load settings if the file name is changed.  
U
337  
G button B setup menu  
Virtual Horizon  
Display a virtual horizon based on  
information from the camera image sensor.  
If the camera is level, the reference line will  
be displayed in green.  
Reference line  
D Tilting the Camera  
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a  
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the  
amount of tilt will not be displayed.  
A See Also  
For information on using the exposure indicators as a tilt meter, see  
Custom Setting f4 (Assign Fn button > Fn button press; 0316, 318).  
For information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see page 62.  
U
338  
G button B setup menu  
AF Fine Tune  
Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. AF tuning is not  
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal  
focus; use only when required.  
Option  
AF fine  
tune  
Description  
On: Turn AF tuning on.  
Off: Turn AF tuning off.  
(On/Off)  
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU  
lenses only). Press or to choose  
Saved a value between +20 and –20.  
value Values for up to 20 lens types can be  
stored. Only one value can be  
Move focal  
point away  
from camera.  
1
3
Current  
value  
stored for each type of lens.  
Choose the AF tuning value used  
when no previously saved value  
exists for the current lens (CPU  
lenses only).  
Default  
Move focal  
point toward value  
camera.  
Previous  
List previously saved AF tuning values. If a value exists for the  
current lens, it will be shown with a icon. To delete a lens from  
the list, highlight the desired lens and press . To change a lens  
V
O
identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as  
the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from  
other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value  
can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the  
List  
saved  
values  
desired lens and press  
2.  
The menu shown at right will be  
displayed; press 1or 3to choose an  
identifier and press J to save changes  
and exit.  
U
339  
D AF Tuning  
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity  
when AF tuning is applied.  
D Live View (Tripod) Mode  
Tuning is not applied to contrast-detect autofocus when Tripod is  
selected in live view mode (055).  
A Saved Value  
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is  
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and  
teleconverter.  
G button B setup menu  
Firmware Version  
View the current camera firmware version.  
U
340  
N The Retouch Menu:  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch  
menu) tab.  
G button  
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or  
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only  
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is  
inserted in the camera.  
Option  
0
i
j
k
D-Lighting *  
344  
345  
346  
347  
348  
348  
349  
353  
355  
357  
74  
Red-eye correction *  
Trim  
l
Monochrome *  
Filter effects *  
Color balance *  
Image overlay  
NEF (RAW) processing  
Resize  
m
n
o
7
8
p
9
Side-by-side comparison  
Edit movie  
* Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set  
Picture Control (0170).  
U
341  
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1 Select an item in the  
retouch menu.  
Press 1or 3to highlight an  
item, 2to select. Depending  
on the option selected, a menu  
may be displayed; highlight an  
option and press 2.  
2 Select a picture.  
The pictures on the memory  
card will be displayed. Use the  
multi selector to highlight a  
picture (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the N button).  
To view images in other locations, press  
1while pressing N and select the  
desired card and folder as described on  
page 224.  
A Retouch  
The camera may not be able to display or  
retouch images created with other devices.  
U
342  
3 Display retouch options.  
Press J to display retouch options (see  
the section for the selected option for  
details). To exit without creating a  
retouched copy, press G.  
A Monitor off Delay  
The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are  
performed for 20 s. Any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase  
the time the monitor remains on, choose a longer menu display  
time for Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0306).  
4 Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a retouched  
copy. Retouched copies are  
indicated by a N icon.  
D Retouching Copies  
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch  
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and  
Edit movie > Choose start point/Choose end point each option can  
only be applied once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of  
detail). Copies created with Trim, Resize, or Save selected frame can  
not be further modified. D-Lighting, red-eye correction, filter effects, and  
color balance can not be applied to monochrome copies.  
A Image Quality  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF  
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are  
the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF (RAW)  
photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created  
from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the  
same size as the original. Size-priority compression is used when copies  
are saved in JPEG format.  
U
343  
G button N retouch menu  
D-Lighting  
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit  
photographs.  
Before  
After  
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of  
correction performed. The effect can be  
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy  
the photograph.  
U
344  
G button N retouch menu  
Red-Eye Correction  
This option is used to correct “red-eye”  
caused by the flash and is available only with  
photographs taken using a flash. The  
photograph selected for red-eye correction is  
previewed as shown at right. Confirm the  
effects of red-eye correction and create a  
copy as described in the following table. Note that red-eye  
correction may not always produce the expected results and may  
in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that  
are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before  
proceeding.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press N button  
and rotate main  
command dial right  
Zoom in  
N +  
to zoom in, left to  
zoom out. While  
photo is zoomed in,  
Zoom out  
N +  
press N and use  
View other  
areas of  
image  
multi selector to view areas of image not  
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector  
pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of  
frame. While N button is pressed, area  
currently visible in monitor is indicated by  
yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.  
If the camera detects red-eye in the  
selected photograph, a copy will be created  
that has been processed to reduce its  
effects. No copy will be created if the  
camera is unable to detect red-eye.  
N +  
Cancel zoom  
J
Create copy  
J
U
345  
G button N retouch menu  
Trim  
Create a cropped copy of the selected  
photograph. The selected photograph is  
displayed with the selected crop shown in  
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in  
the following table.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press N button and rotate main  
command dial right to reduce the size  
of the crop.  
Reduce size of  
crop  
N +  
Press N button and rotate main  
command dial left to increase the size of  
the crop.  
Increase size of  
crop  
N +  
Rotate the main command dial to  
switch between aspect ratios of 3 : 2,  
4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1, and 16 : 9.  
Change crop  
aspect ratio  
Use multi selector to move the crop to  
other areas of the image.  
Move crop  
Press center of multi selector to preview  
cropped image.  
Preview crop  
Create copy  
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
J
U
346  
A Trim: Image Quality and Size  
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos  
have an image quality (083) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created from  
JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the  
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.  
Aspect  
ratio  
Possible sizes  
3 : 2 3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856, 960 × 640, 640 × 424  
4 : 3 3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960, 960 × 720, 640 × 480  
5 : 4 3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960, 896 × 720, 608 × 480  
1 : 1 2,560 × 2,560, 1,920 × 1,920, 1,440 × 1,440, 960 × 960, 720 × 720, 480 × 480  
16 : 9 3,424 × 1,920, 2,560 × 1,440, 1,920 × 1,080, 1,280 × 720, 960 × 536, 640 × 360  
A Viewing Cropped Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed.  
G button N retouch menu  
Monochrome  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,  
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white  
monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype  
displays a preview of the selected  
image; press 1to increase color  
saturation, 3to decrease. Press J  
to create a monochrome copy.  
Increase  
saturation  
Decrease  
saturation  
U
347  
G button N retouch menu  
Filter Effects  
Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter  
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight  
filter, making the picture less  
blue. The effect can be previewed  
in the monitor as shown at right.  
Skylight  
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the  
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in  
the monitor.  
Warm filter  
G button N retouch menu  
Color Balance  
Use the multi selector to create a copy with  
modified color balance as shown below. The  
effect is displayed in the monitor together  
with red, green, and blue histograms (0228)  
giving the distribution of tones in the copy.  
Press J to copy the photograph.  
Increase amount of green  
Increase  
amount of  
blue  
Increase  
amount of  
amber  
Increase amount of magenta  
U
348  
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the  
monitor, press N, rotate the main command  
dial to the right, and then release the N button.  
The histogram will be updated to show data only  
for the portion of the image displayed in the  
monitor. To choose the area displayed using  
zoom, press N and use the multi selector. To  
exit zoom, press the N button and rotate the main command dial to  
the left.  
G button N retouch menu  
Image Overlay  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to  
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;  
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image  
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an  
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image  
quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image  
quality and size (083, 86; all options are available). To create a  
NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).  
1 Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay and  
press 2. The dialog shown at  
right will be displayed, with  
Image 1 highlighted.  
U
349  
2 Display NEF (RAW) images.  
Press J to display a picture  
selection dialog listing only  
NEF (RAW) images created with  
this camera.  
3 Select a photograph.  
Highlight the first photograph  
in the overlay. To view the  
highlighted photograph full  
frame, press and hold the N  
button. Press J to select the  
highlighted photograph and return to the preview display.  
4 Select the second  
photograph.  
The selected image will appear  
as Image 1. Press 2to  
highlight Image 2 and repeat  
steps 2–3 to select the second photo.  
U
350  
5 Set gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2  
and optimize exposure for the  
overlay by pressing 1or 3to  
select the gain for image 1  
from values between 0.1 and  
2.0. Repeat for the second image. The default value is 1.0;  
selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain.  
The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.  
6 Highlight the Preview  
column.  
Press 4or 2to highlight the  
Preview column.  
7 Preview the overlay.  
Press 1or 3to highlight  
Overlay and press J (to save  
the overlay without displaying  
a preview, highlight Save and  
press J). To return to Step 5  
and select new photos or adjust gain, press N.  
U
351  
8 Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is  
displayed to save the overlay.  
After an overlay is created, the  
resulting image will be  
displayed full-frame in the  
monitor.  
+
D Image Overlay  
Only NEF (RAW) photographs created with the D3S can be selected for  
image overlay. Other images are not displayed in the selection dialog.  
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit-depth  
can be combined.  
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,  
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure  
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for  
white balance and picture control as the photograph selected for  
Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when  
it is saved; copyright information, however, is not copied. Overlays  
saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for Type in the  
NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the  
original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority  
compression.  
U
352  
G button N retouch menu  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
1 Select NEF (RAW)  
processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW)  
processing and press 2to  
display a picture selection  
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.  
2 Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight a photograph (to  
view the highlighted  
photograph full frame, press  
and hold the N button). Press  
J to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to the  
next step.  
U
353  
3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.  
Choose image quality (083), image size (086),  
white balance (0150), exposure compensation (0134),  
a Picture Control (0170; note that the Picture Control grid  
can not be displayed), high ISO noise reduction (0291), color  
space (0183), and vignette control (0290) for the JPEG copy.  
Note that white balance and vignette control are not available  
with multiple exposures or pictures created with image  
overlay and that exposure compensation increments differ  
from those used in shooting mode.  
Image quality  
Image size  
White balance  
Exposure compensation  
Picture Control  
High ISO noise reduction  
Color space  
Vignette control  
4 Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J to  
create a JPEG copy of the  
selected photograph. To exit  
without copying the  
photograph, press the G  
button.  
U
354  
G button N retouch menu  
Resize  
Create small copies of selected photographs.  
1 Select Resize.  
Highlight Resize and press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will  
be displayed.  
2 Choose a size.  
Highlight Choose size and  
press 2.  
The following options will be  
displayed; highlight an option  
and press J.  
Option Size (pixels) Option Size (pixels)  
2.5 M 1920 × 1280 0.6 M 960 × 640  
1.1 M 1280 × 856 0.3 M 640 × 424  
U
355  
3 Choose pictures.  
Highlight Select image and  
press 2.  
The dialog shown at right will  
be displayed; highlight  
pictures using the multi  
selector and press the center of  
the multi selector to select or  
deselect (to view the  
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the N button).  
Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the  
selection is complete. Note that photographs taken at an  
image-area setting of 5 : 4 (079) can not be resized.  
4 Save the resized copies.  
A confirmation dialog will be displayed. Highlight Yes and  
press J to save the resized copies.  
A Viewing Resized Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.  
A Image Quality  
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos  
have an image quality (083) of JPEG fine; copies created from JPEG  
photos have the same image quality as the original.  
U
356  
G button N retouch menu  
Side-by-Side Comparison  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.  
Making a Side-by-Side Comparison  
1 Select Side-by-side  
comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side  
comparison and press 2to  
display a picture selection  
dialog.  
2 Select a picture.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight a picture and press  
J. Only retouched copies  
(shown by a N icon) or  
photographs that have been  
retouched can be selected. To view the highlighted  
photograph full frame, press and hold the N button.  
U
357  
3 Compare the copy with the  
Options used to  
create copy  
original.  
The source image is displayed  
on the left, the retouched copy  
on the right, with the options  
used to create the copy listed  
at the top of the display. Press  
4or 2to switch between the  
source image and the  
Source Retouched  
image  
copy  
retouched copy. To view the highlighted picture full frame,  
press and hold the N button. If the copy was created from  
two images using Image overlay, press 1or 3to view the  
other source image. To exit to retouch menu, press the G  
button. To return to Step 2 with the highlighted image  
selected, press J.  
D Side-by-Side Comparison  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a  
photograph that was protected (0238), has since been deleted or  
hidden (0275), is on a card that is now in a different slot, or contains  
embedded image authentication information (0334).  
U
358  
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu  
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.  
G button  
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized  
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,  
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If  
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu  
(0363).  
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.  
Adding Options to My Menu  
1 Select Add items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Add  
items and press 2.  
2 Select a menu.  
Highlight the name of the  
menu containing the option  
you wish to add and press 2.  
U
359  
3 Select an item.  
Highlight the desired menu  
item and press J.  
4 Position the new item.  
Press 1or 3to move the new  
item up or down in My Menu.  
Press J to add the new item.  
5 Add more items.  
The items currently displayed in My  
Menu are indicated by a check mark.  
Items indicated by a V icon can not be  
selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select  
additional items.  
U
360  
Deleting Options from My Menu  
1 Select Remove items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.  
2 Select items.  
Highlight items and press 2to  
select or deselect. Selected  
items are indicated by a check  
mark.  
3 Select Done.  
Highlight Done and press J. A  
confirmation dialog will be  
displayed.  
4 Delete the selected items.  
Press J to delete the selected  
items.  
A Deleting Items in My Menu  
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O  
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to  
remove the selected item from My Menu.  
U
361  
Reordering Options in My Menu  
1 Select Rank items.  
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.  
2 Select an item.  
Highlight the item you wish to  
move and press J.  
3 Position the item.  
Press 1or 3to move the item  
up or down in My Menu and  
press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to  
reposition additional items.  
A Reordering Items in My Menu  
The item currently highlighted in My Menu can be moved up or down  
by pressing the N button and pressing 1or 3. Release the N button  
when the operation is complete.  
U
362  
Displaying Recent Settings  
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m Recent  
settings for O My Menu > Choose tab.  
1 Select Choose tab.  
In My Menu (O), highlight  
Choose tab and press 2.  
2 Select m Recent settings.  
Highlight m Recent settings  
and press J. The name of the  
menu will change from “MY  
MENU” to “RECENT SETTINGS.”  
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu  
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O My Menu for  
m Recent settings > Choose tab.  
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu  
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press  
the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to  
delete the selected item.  
U
363  
U
364  
n
Technical Notes  
– Camera Care, Options, and Resources  
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,  
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error  
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera.  
Compatible Lenses................................................................366  
Other Accessories..................................................................372  
Caring for the Camera ..........................................................377  
Storage ......................................................................................................377  
Cleaning....................................................................................................377  
The Low-Pass Filter................................................................................378  
Replacing the Focusing Screen ........................................................384  
Replacing the Clock Battery...............................................................386  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..................388  
Defaults...................................................................................392  
Exposure Program.................................................................397  
Troubleshooting....................................................................398  
Error Messages.......................................................................403  
Specifications.........................................................................408  
Calibrating Batteries .............................................................................417  
Approved Memory Cards.....................................................419  
Memory Card Capacity.........................................................420  
Battery Life .............................................................................423  
n
365  
Compatible Lenses  
Camera setting  
Exposure  
mode  
Focus mode  
Metering system  
M (with  
a
Z
b
S
P
S
A
M
electronic  
C
M
3D Color  
Lens/accessory  
Type G or D AF NIKKOR2  
rangefinder)  
3
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR  
PC-E NIKKOR series  
PC Micro 85mm  
5
5
5
5
3,5  
5
6
3,5  
3
f/2.8D4  
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter7  
Other AF NIKKOR  
(except lenses for F3AF)  
AI-P NIKKOR  
8
8
9
9
3
3
10  
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR  
or Nikon Series E lenses12  
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm  
f/4  
Reflex-NIKKOR  
PC-NIKKOR  
AI-type Teleconverter18  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing  
Attachment19  
10  
13  
14  
15  
16  
13  
17  
13  
15  
5
15  
8
14  
8
20  
Auto extension rings  
(PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;  
PN-11)  
8
13  
1 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.  
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.  
3 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0116).  
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work  
properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than  
the maximum aperture is used.  
5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
6 Manual exposure mode only.  
7 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (0368).  
8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
n
366  
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–  
70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at  
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte  
screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in  
viewfinder is in focus.  
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
11 Some lenses can not be used (see page 369).  
12 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera  
body. Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on  
camera.  
13 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0214), aperture  
value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel.  
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using  
Non-CPU lens data (0214). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired  
results are not achieved.  
15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using  
Non-CPU lens data (0214).  
16 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than flash  
sync speed by one step or more.  
17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto  
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE  
lock and shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens  
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.  
18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–  
105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See  
teleconverter manual for details.  
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required  
depending on camera orientation.  
20 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture  
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking  
photograph.  
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.  
n
367  
A Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G  
and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G lenses are not  
equipped with a lens aperture ring.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter  
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and  
AF-I lenses:  
• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED 1 • AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED  
• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II  
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II  
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2  
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2  
1 Autofocus not supported.  
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2  
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G  
ED VR II  
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED  
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED  
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR  
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2  
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2  
2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/  
TC-20E II.  
A Lens f-number  
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.  
n
368  
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
If lens data are specified using Non-CPU lens data (0214), many of the  
features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU  
lenses. If lens data are not specified, color matrix metering can not be  
used, and center-weighted metering is used when matrix metering is  
selected.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes g and h, when  
aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum  
aperture has not been specified using Non-CPU lens data, the camera  
aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum  
aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture  
ring. Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure  
modes e and f. The exposure-mode indicator (e or f) in the top control  
panel will blink, and g will be displayed in the viewfinder.  
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following can NOT be used with the D3S:  
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter  
• Non-AI lenses  
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm  
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,  
AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900  
or earlier)  
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers  
851001–906200)  
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers  
142361–143000)  
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing  
unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,  
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)  
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,  
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
• 2.1cm f/4  
• Extension Ring K2  
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers  
174041–174180)  
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers • Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers  
200111–200310)  
174031–174127)  
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers  
280001–300490)  
n
369  
A Picture Angle and Focal Length  
The D3S can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm (135) format cameras.  
If Auto DX crop is on and a 35mm format lens is attached, the picture  
angle will be the same as a frame of 35mm film (36.0 × 23.9 mm); if a DX  
lens is attached, the picture angle will automatically be adjusted to  
23.5 × 15.6 mm (DX format).  
To choose a picture angle different from that of the current lens, turn  
Auto DX crop off and select from FX (36×24), 1.2× (30×20),  
DX (24×16), and 5 : 4 (30×24). If a 35mm format lens is attached, the  
picture angle could be reduced by 1.5 × by selecting DX (24×16) or by  
1.2 × by selecting 1.2× (30×20), to expose a smaller area, or the aspect  
ratio could be changed by selecting 5 : 4 (30×24).  
FX (36×24) picture size (36.0 × 23.9 mm,  
equivalent to 35mm format camera)  
1.2× (30×20) picture size  
(30.0 × 20.0 mm)  
DX (24×16) picture size  
(23.5 × 15.6 mm, equivalent to DX  
format camera)  
5 : 4 (30×24) picture size  
Lens  
(30.0 × 23.9 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Picture angle (FX (36×24);  
35mm format)  
Picture angle (1.2× (30×20))  
Picture angle (DX (24×16); DX format)  
Picture angle (5 : 4 (30×24))  
n
370  
A Picture Angle and Focal Length (Continued)  
The DX (24×16) picture angle is about 1.5 times smaller than the 35mm  
format picture angle, while the 1.2× (30×20) picture angle is about 1.2  
times smaller and the 5 : 4 (30×24) picture angle is about 1.1 times  
smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35mm format when  
DX (24×16) is selected, multiply the focal length of the lens by about  
1.5, by about 1.2 when is 1.2× (30×20) selected, or by about 1.1 when  
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected (for example, the effective focal length of a  
50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX (24×16) is  
selected, 60 mm when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, or 55 mm when  
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected).  
n
371  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for  
the D3S.  
EN-EL4a and EN-EL4 Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries (026, 28):  
Additional EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 batteries are available from  
local retailers and Nikon service representatives. These  
batteries can be recharged and calibrated using an MH-22  
or MH-21 quick charger.  
MH-22 and MH-21 Quick Chargers (026, 417): The MH-22,  
Power sources  
MH-21 can be used to recharge EN-EL4a and EN-EL4  
batteries.  
AC Adapter EH-6: This AC adapter can be used to power the  
camera for extended periods.  
Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless  
and Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera  
memory card can be viewed by computers on the same  
network or copied to a computer for long-term storage.  
The camera can also be controlled from any computer on  
the network using Camera Control Pro 2 (available  
Wireless LAN  
adapters  
separately). Note that the WT-4 requires an independent  
power source in the form of an optional EH-6 AC adapter  
or EN-EL3e battery. See the WT-4 manual for details.  
n
372  
Focusing Screens (0384): The focusing screens available for  
the D3S are listed below.  
Type B  
A type B focusing screen  
Brite View clear-  
is supplied with the  
matte VI  
camera.  
focusing screen  
Type E focusing screens  
are etched with a grid,  
making them suitable  
for copying and  
architectural  
focusing screen  
photography. Best  
Type E  
clear-matte VI  
results are achieved with  
PC-NIKKOR lenses.  
Rubber Eyepiece Cup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the  
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.  
Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-17C: To accommodate  
individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are  
available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2 m–1. Use  
diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can  
not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment  
control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses  
before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be  
achieved. The DK-17C is equipped with a safety lock.  
Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the view  
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2 × for greater  
precision when framing. The DK-17M is equipped with a  
safety lock.  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in  
the viewfinder. Use for close-up photography, copying,  
telephoto lenses, and other tasks that call for added  
precision. DK-18 eyepiece adapter (available separately)  
required.  
Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching  
the DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing  
attachment to the D3S.  
n
373  
DK-14 and DK-17A Antifog Finder Eyepieces: These viewfinder  
eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions.  
The DK-17A is equipped with a safety lock.  
DR-5 and DR-4 Right-Angle Viewing Attachments: The DR-5 and  
DR-4 attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle,  
allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from  
above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting  
position. The DR-5 can also magnify the view through the  
viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when framing  
(note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when  
the view is magnified).  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories  
• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-on,  
slip-in, and rear-interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters  
manufactured by other makers may interfere with  
autofocus or electronic range finding.  
• The D3S can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use  
the C-PL circular polarizing filter instead.  
• Use NC filters to protect the lens.  
Filters  
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended  
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when  
a bright light source is in the frame.  
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters  
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,  
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,  
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for  
details.  
• Nikon SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 Speedlights  
• Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200 controlled remotely  
Optional flash using the SB-900, SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless  
units  
Speedlight commander.  
• Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800  
See page 187 for more information.  
Water Guard WG-AS1: The optional WG-AS1 is a water guard  
that covers the base of SB-900 flash units mounted on the  
D3S, increasing the SB-900’s splash resistance by  
protecting the accessory shoe contacts from rain and  
spray.  
Water guards  
n
374  
EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows  
Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in  
PCMCIA card slots.  
PC card  
adapters  
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such  
advanced editing features as selection control points and  
an auto retouch brush.  
Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a  
computer and save photographs directly to the computer  
hard disk.  
Image Authentication: Determine whether photographs  
taken with image authentication (0 334) on have been  
modified after shooting.  
Software  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon  
software offers an auto update feature when the computer is  
connected to the Internet. See the websites listed on page xxiv  
for the latest information on supported operating systems.  
BF-1B and BF-1A Body Caps: The body cap keeps the mirror,  
viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a  
lens is not in place.  
Body cap  
n
375  
The D3S is equipped with a ten-pin  
remote terminal for remote control  
and automatic photography. The  
terminal is provided with a cap,  
which protects the contacts when  
the terminal is not in use. The  
following accessories can be used  
(all lengths are approximate):  
Remote Cord MC-22:Remote shutter release with blue, yellow,  
and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter-  
triggering device, allowing control via sound or electronic  
signals (length 1 m/3 ft. 3 in.).  
Remote Cord MC-30: Remote shutter release; can be used to  
reduce camera shake (length 80 cm/2 ft. 7 in.).  
Remote Cord MC-36: Remote shutter release; can be used for  
interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or  
keep the shutter open during a time exposure (length  
85 cm/2 ft. 9 in.).  
Extension Cord MC-21: Can be connected to ML-3 or MC-series  
20, 22, 23, 25, 30, or 36. Only one MC-21 can be used at a  
time (length 3 m/9 ft. 10 in.).  
Remote  
terminal  
accessories  
Connecting Cord MC-23: Connects two cameras for  
simultaneous operation (length 40 cm/1 ft. 4 in.).  
Adapter Cord MC-25: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for  
connection to devices with two-pin terminals, including  
the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2  
modulite control set (length 20 cm/8 in.).  
GPS Unit GP-1 (0217): Record latitude, longitude, altitude,  
and UTC time with pictures.  
GPS Adapter Cord MC-35 (0217): Connects GPS devices to D3S  
via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device  
(length 35 cm/1 ft. 2 in.).  
Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote  
control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft. 3 in.).  
n
376  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove  
the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in  
place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-  
ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or  
camphor moth balls or in locations that:  
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic  
fields, such as televisions or radios  
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below  
–10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a  
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,  
wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled  
water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign  
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under  
warranty.  
Camera  
body  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and  
lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
Lens,  
mirror, and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove  
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens  
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing  
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a  
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this  
Monitor  
could result in damage or malfunction.  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
n
377  
The Low-Pass Filter  
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted  
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or  
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the  
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The  
filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or  
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is  
turned on or off.  
❚❚ “Clean Now”  
1 Place the camera base down.  
Image sensor cleaning is most effective  
when the camera is placed base down as  
shown at right.  
2 Select Clean image  
sensor in the setup  
menu.  
G button  
Press G to display the  
menus. Highlight Clean  
image sensor in the setup  
menu and press 2.  
n
378  
3 Select Clean now.  
Highlight Clean now and press  
2.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed while cleaning is in progress.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed when cleaning is complete.  
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
1 Select Clean at startup/  
shutdown.  
Display the Clean image  
sensor menu as described in  
Step 2 on the previous page.  
Highlight Clean at startup/  
shutdown and press 2.  
n
379  
2 Select an option.  
Highlight one of the following  
options and press J.  
Option  
Description  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned  
each time the camera is turned on.  
The image sensor is automatically cleaned  
during shutdown each time the camera is  
turned off.  
5 Clean at startup  
Clean at  
6
shutdown  
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at  
7
8
& shutdown  
Cleaning off  
startup and at shutdown.  
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning.  
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be  
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean  
the image sensor manually (0381) or consult a Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image  
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s  
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.  
n
380  
❚❚ Manual Cleaning  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using  
the Clean image sensor (0378) option in the setup menu, the  
filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however,  
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon  
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized  
service personnel.  
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or  
cleaning the low-pass filter. If the battery level is below J  
(60%), turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL4a  
battery or connect an optional EH-6 AC adapter.  
2 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.  
Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning in  
the setup menu and press 2(note that  
this option is not available at battery  
levels of J or below).  
3 Press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed in the monitor and a row of  
dashes will appear in the top control  
panel and viewfinder. To restore normal  
operation without inspecting the low-  
pass filter, turn the camera off.  
n
381  
4 Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release  
button all the way down.  
The mirror will be raised and  
the shutter curtain will open,  
revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder will  
turn off and the row of dashes in the top control panel will  
blink.  
5 Examine the low-pass filter.  
Holding the camera so that light falls on  
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for  
dust or lint. If no foreign objects are  
present, proceed to Step 7.  
6 Clean the filter.  
Remove any dust and lint from the filter  
with a blower. Do not use a blower-  
brush, as the bristles could damage the  
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with a  
blower can only be removed by Nikon-  
authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should  
you touch or wipe the filter.  
7 Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter  
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.  
n
382  
D Use a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers  
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To  
prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:  
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source  
while the mirror is raised.  
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and  
the self-timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close  
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning  
or inspection immediately.  
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from  
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and  
shipping. The D3S, however, is designed to be used with  
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when  
lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign  
matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in  
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera  
when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign  
matter that may be adhering to the body cap.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter  
as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service  
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on  
the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately;  
0
375) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging  
applications.  
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon  
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or  
Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be  
serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these  
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly  
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories  
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units,  
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.  
n
383  
Replacing the Focusing Screen  
A type B clear-matte VI focusing screen is inserted in the camera at  
shipment. To insert an optional type E clear-matte VI focusing  
screen for D3S cameras (0373):  
1 Remove the lens.  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
2 Unlatch the screen holder.  
Using the tweezers supplied with the  
focusing screen, pull the focusing screen  
latch towards you. The screen holder will  
spring open.  
3 Remove the existing screen.  
Remove the existing screen, using the  
supplied tweezers and being careful to  
handle the screen by the tab to avoid  
scratches.  
4 Insert the replacement screen.  
Using the tweezers and handling the  
screen by the tab, set the replacement  
screen in the holder.  
n
384  
5 Latch the screen holder.  
Push the front edge of holder upward  
until it clicks into place.  
D Replacing Focusing Screens  
Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens.  
A Framing Grids  
The display in type E focusing screens may be slightly out of position  
depending on how the focusing screen is placed.  
n
385  
Replacing the Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life  
of about four years. If the B icon is displayed in the top control  
panel while the exposure meters are on, the battery is running low  
and needs to be replaced. When the battery is exhausted, the B  
icon will blink while the exposure meters are on. Photographs can  
still be taken but will not be stamped with the correct time and  
date, and interval timer photography will not function correctly.  
Replace the battery as described below.  
1 Remove the main battery.  
The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main  
battery chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the EN-EL4a  
battery.  
2 Open the clock battery chamber.  
Slide the clock battery chamber cover  
toward the front of the main battery  
chamber.  
3 Remove the clock battery.  
4 Insert the replacement battery.  
Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so  
that the positive side (the side marked  
with “+” and the battery name) is visible.  
n
386  
5 Close the clock battery chamber.  
Slide the clock battery chamber cover  
towards the back of the main battery  
chamber until it clicks into place.  
6 Replace the main battery.  
Reinsert the EN-EL4a.  
7 Set the camera clock.  
Set the camera to the current date and  
time (034). Until the date and time have  
been set, the B icon will flash in the top  
control panel.  
ACAUTION  
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could  
cause an explosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.  
D Inserting the Clock Battery  
Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery  
incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could  
damage the camera.  
n
387  
Caring for the Camera and  
Battery: Cautions  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or  
vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed  
in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal  
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as  
occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause  
condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the  
device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden  
changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the  
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or  
magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by  
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,  
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal  
circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun  
or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may  
cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in  
photographs.  
n
388  
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove  
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the  
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth  
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In  
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or  
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon  
return to normal.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently  
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other  
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (0378) for information on cleaning the low-pass  
filter.  
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily  
damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the  
curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents  
from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.  
The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no  
affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.  
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-  
ventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to  
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,  
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic  
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a  
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that  
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be  
replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a  
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before  
putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before  
putting the battery away.  
n
389  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not  
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while  
images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these  
circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory  
or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid  
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is  
connected.  
Dry the accessory shoe cover: If the camera is used in the rain, water may  
penetrate the supplied BS-2 accessory shoe cover. Remove and dry the  
accessory shoe cover after using the camera in the rain.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor may contain a few pixels that are always lit  
or that do not light. This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not  
indicate a malfunction. Images recorded with the product are unaffected.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or  
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.  
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois  
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching  
the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.  
n
390  
Batteries: Dirt on the battery terminals can prevent the camera from  
functioning and should be removed with a soft, dry cloth before use.  
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling batteries:  
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
The battery may become hot when used for extended periods. Observe  
due caution when handling the battery.  
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
After removing the battery from the camera, be sure to replace the  
terminal cover.  
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important  
occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on  
your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on  
short notice.  
On cold days, the capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the  
battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold  
weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as  
necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery  
performance.  
Used batteries are a valuable resource. Please recycle used batteries in  
accord with local regulations.  
n
391  
Defaults  
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed  
below. For information on two-button reset, see page 200.  
Playback Menu Defaults  
Option  
Playback folder (0275)  
Image review (0281)  
After delete (0281)  
Rotate tall (0282)  
Default  
NCD3S  
Off  
Show next  
Off  
Slide show (0282)  
Frame interval (0282)  
Audio Playback (0283)  
2 s  
Off  
Shooting Menu Defaults 1  
Option  
Extended menu banks (0287)  
File naming (0290)  
Slot 2 (088)  
Default  
Off  
DSC  
Overflow  
JPEG normal  
Large  
Image quality (083)  
Image size (086)  
Image area (078)  
Auto DX crop (078)  
Choose image area (079)  
JPEG compression (085)  
NEF (RAW) recording (085)  
Type  
On  
FX (36×24)  
Size priority  
Lossless compressed  
NEF (RAW) bit depth  
White balance (0149)  
Fine tuning (0153)  
Choose color temp. (0157)  
Set Picture Control (0170)  
Color space (0183)  
Active D-Lighting (0181)  
Vignette control (0290)  
12-bit  
Auto  
Off  
5000 K  
Standard  
sRGB  
Off  
Normal  
n
392  
Long exp. NR (0291)  
Off  
High ISO NR (0291)  
Normal  
ISO sensitivity settings (0109)  
ISO sensitivity (0110)  
200  
Off  
Tripod  
ISO sensitivity auto control (0112)  
Live view mode (055, 59)  
Multiple exposure (0202) 2  
Multiple exposure mode (0203)  
Number of shots (0204)  
Auto gain (0205)  
Off  
2
On  
Movie settings (070)  
Quality (070)  
Microphone (071)  
Destination (071)  
640 × 424 (3 : 2)  
Auto sensitivity (A)  
Slot 1  
High-sensitivity movie mode (072)  
Interval timer shooting (0208)  
Off  
Reset 3  
1 Default settings can be restored using Reset shooting menu (0287).  
With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer shooting,  
only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be reset.  
2 Applies to all banks. Reset shooting menu can not be selected while  
shooting is in progress.  
3 Applies to all banks. Shooting ends when reset is performed.  
Custom Settings Menu Defaults *  
Option  
Default  
Release  
Focus  
a1 AF-C priority selection (0295)  
a2 AF-S priority selection (0296)  
a3 Dynamic AF area (0296)  
a4 Focus tracking with lock-on (0298)  
a5 AF activation (0298)  
9 points  
3 (Normal)  
Shutter/AF-ON  
a6 Focus point illumination (0299)  
Manual focus mode  
On  
On  
Continuous mode  
Focus point brightness  
Normal  
n
393  
Option  
a7 Focus point wrap-around (0299)  
a8 AF point selection (0300)  
a9 AF-ON button (0300)  
a10 Vertical AF-ON button (0301)  
b1 ISO sensitivity step value (0302)  
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl. (0302)  
b3 EV steps for exposure comp. (0302)  
b4 Easy exposure compensation (0303)  
b5 Center-weighted area (0304)  
b6 Fine tune optimal exposure (0304)  
Matrix metering  
Default  
No wrap  
51 points  
AF-ON  
AF-ON  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
Off  
ø 12 mm  
0
0
0
Center-weighted metering  
Spot metering  
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L (0305)  
c2 Auto meter-off delay (0305)  
c3 Self-timer (0305)  
Off  
6 s  
10 s  
c4 Monitor off delay (0306)  
Playback  
10 s  
20 s  
10 s  
4 s  
Menus  
Information display  
Image review  
d1 Beep (0306)  
Off  
d2 Shooting speed (0307)  
Continuous high-speed  
9 fps  
5 fps  
130  
On  
Continuous low-speed  
d3 Max. continuous release (0307)  
d4 File number sequence (0308)  
d5 Control panel/viewfinder (0309)  
Rear control panel  
ISO sensitivity  
Viewfinder display  
Frame count  
d6 Information display (0309)  
d7 Screen tips (0310)  
Auto  
On  
d8 LCD illumination (0310)  
d9 Exposure delay mode (0310)  
Off  
Off  
n
394  
Option  
e1 Flash sync speed (0311)  
e2 Flash shutter speed (0312)  
e3 Modeling flash (0312)  
e4 Auto bracketing set (0312)  
e5 Auto bracketing (Mode M) (0313)  
e6 Bracketing order (0313)  
f1 Multi selector center button (0314)  
Shooting mode  
Playback mode  
Live view  
f2 Multi selector (0315)  
f3 Photo info/playback (0315)  
f4 Assign Fn button (0316)  
Fn button press (0316)  
Default  
1/250 s  
1/60 s  
On  
AE & flash  
Flash/speed  
MTR > under > over  
Select center focus point  
Thumbnail on/off  
Start movie recording  
Do nothing  
Info /Playback  
None  
Fn button + command dials (0318)  
f5 Assign preview button (0321)  
Preview button press  
Preview + command dials  
f6 Assign AE-L/AF-L button (0321)  
AE-L/AF-L button press  
AE-L/AF-L + command dials  
f7 Assign BKT button (0322)  
f8 Customize command dials (0322)  
Reverse rotation  
Choose image area  
Preview  
None  
AE/AF lock  
None  
Auto bracketing  
No  
Change main/sub  
Aperture setting  
Menus and playback  
Off  
Sub-command dial  
Off  
f9 Release button to use dial (0324)  
f10 No memory card? (0324)  
f11 Reverse indicators (0324)  
No  
Enable release  
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using  
Reset custom settings (0294).  
n
395  
Setup Menu Defaults  
Option  
Default  
LCD brightness (0326)  
Clean image sensor  
Clean at startup/shutdown  
HDMI (0329)  
0
Cleaning off  
Auto  
Time zone and date (0330)  
Daylight saving time  
Auto image rotation (0332)  
Voice memo options (0246)  
Voice memo  
Voice memo overwrite  
Voice memo button  
Audio output  
Off  
On  
Off  
Disable  
Press and hold  
Via speaker  
Off  
Image authentication (0334)  
GPS (0220)  
Auto meter off  
Use GPS to set camera clock  
Enable  
Yes  
n
396  
Exposure Program  
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the  
following graph:  
ISO 200; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum  
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)  
f/1  
f/1.4  
f/2  
f/2.8  
f/4  
f/5.6  
f/8  
f/11  
f/16  
f/22  
f/32  
8"  
30" 15"  
4" 2" 1"  
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000  
Shutter speed  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity;  
the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent.  
When matrix metering is used, values over 17 1/3 EV are reduced to  
17 1/3 EV.  
n
397  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of  
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon  
representative.  
Display  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter  
adjustment lenses (041, 373).  
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (026, 43).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2  
(Auto meter-off delay) or c4 (Monitor off delay) (0305, 306).  
Unusual characters displayed in top control panel: See “A Note on Electronically-  
Controlled Cameras,” below.  
Displays in control panels or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response  
times and brightness of these displays varies with temperature.  
A A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the  
monitor or top control panel and the camera may stop functioning. In  
most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static  
charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery, and turn  
the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available  
separately), disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera  
on again. In the event of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or  
Nikon-authorized service representative. Note that disconnecting the  
power source as described above may result in loss of any data not  
recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data  
already recorded to the card will not be affected.  
n
398  
Shooting  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
• Memory card is full or not inserted (036, 44).  
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest  
f-number. If B is displayed in the top control panel, select Aperture  
ring for Custom Setting f8 (Customize command dials) > Aperture  
setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture (0323).  
• Exposure mode S selected with A selected for shutter speed  
(0404).  
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting  
d9 (Exposure delay mode; 0310).  
Photos are out of focus:  
• Rotate focus-mode selector to S or C (090).  
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock  
(096, 99).  
Tripod selected in live view: camera will not focus when shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway. Use AF-ON button (056).  
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be  
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using  
optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash unit, choose 1/250 s  
(Auto FP) for full range of shutter speeds (0311).  
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in  
focus mode C: use AE-L/AF-L button to lock focus (097).  
Can not select focus point:  
• Unlock focus selector lock (094).  
• Auto-area AF selected for AF-area mode: choose another mode (092).  
• Camera is in playback mode (0221).  
• Menus are in use (0273).  
• Press shutter-release button halfway to activate exposure meters (045).  
Image size can not be changed: Image quality set to NEF (RAW) (083).  
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off  
(0291).  
n
399  
Photos not recorded in live view mode:  
• Sound of mirror clicking down when shutter-release button was pressed  
halfway in hand-held mode was mistaken for sound of shutter (063).  
• Unless Release is chosen for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority  
selection), shutter release is disabled if camera is unable to focus when  
focus mode S is selected in hand-held mode (063, 296).  
Flicker or banding appear during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for  
Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power  
supply (0330).  
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flash or other light  
source with brief duration was used during live view or movie recording.  
Highlights are “washed out” in movies or the live view display: Select Off for High-  
sensitivity movie mode (072).  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appears in photos:  
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction  
(0110, 291).  
• Shutter speed is slower than 1 s: use long exposure noise reduction  
(0291).  
• Reddish areas or other artifacts appear in long time-exposures: turn long  
exposure noise reduction on when shooting at a shutter speed of  
A” (0291).  
Photos are blotched or smeared:  
• Clean lens.  
• Clean low-pass filter (0378).  
Colors are unnatural:  
• Adjust white balance to match light source (0150).  
• Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0170).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0160).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created  
with D3S (0164).  
White balance bracketing unavailable:  
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality  
(083).  
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0207).  
n
400  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for  
sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of  
photographs, choose a setting other than A (auto) (0174).  
Can not adjust Picture Control contrast or brightness: Contrast and brightness can  
not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting is on. Turn Active D-Lighting off  
(0174, 182).  
Metering can not be changed: Live view is in progress, autoexposure lock is in  
effect, or movie is being recorded (061, 66, 133).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode e, f, or g  
(0134).  
Sound is not recorded with movies:  
Microphone off is selected for Movie settings > Microphone (071).  
• External microphone is disconnected during recording.  
Playback  
Flashing areas, shooting data, or graphs appear on images: Press 1or 3to choose  
photo information displayed, or change settings for Display mode  
(0225, 277).  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF +  
JPEG (084).  
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other  
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.  
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder  
(0275).  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
• Select On for Rotate tall (0282).  
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0332).  
• Photo is displayed in image review (0224).  
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0332).  
Can not delete photo: Photo is protected. Remove protection (0238).  
Can not retouch picture: Picture was not created with D3S (0342).  
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for  
Playback folder (0275).  
n
401  
Can not change print order: Memory card is full: delete photos (044, 240).  
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG  
copy using NEF (RAW) processing (0353) or transfer to computer and  
print using ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;  
0375).  
Can not print photos: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos can not be printed by direct  
USB connection. Use DPOF print service (TIFF images only), create JPEG  
copy using NEF (RAW) processing (0353), or transfer to computer and  
print using ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;  
0375).  
Photo is not displayed on TV: Choose correct video mode (0329).  
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable  
(available separately) is connected (0271).  
NEF (RAW) photos not displayed in Capture NX: Update to Capture NX 2 (0375).  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor  
cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off  
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can  
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is  
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is  
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor  
cleaning is performed (0327).  
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software  
does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting, or vignette  
control. Use ViewNX (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as  
Capture NX 2 (available separately).  
Can not copy pictures to computer using Nikon Transfer: Operating system is not  
supported (0254). Transfer pictures from the memory card using a card  
reader or card slot.  
Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (034).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain  
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that  
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an  
optional AC adapter (0333).  
n
402  
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in  
the viewfinder, top control panel, and monitor.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Lens aperture ring is  
not set to minimum  
aperture.  
Solution  
Set ring to minimum  
aperture (largest  
f-number).  
0
B
32  
(blinks)  
Ready a fully-charged  
spare battery.  
H
d
Low battery.  
43  
• Battery exhausted.  
• Recharge or replace  
battery.  
• Battery can not be  
used.  
• Contact Nikon-  
authorized service  
representative.  
• An extremely  
exhausted  
rechargeable Li-ion  
battery or a third-  
party battery is  
inserted in the  
camera.  
• Replace the battery,  
or recharge the  
battery if the  
rechargeable Li-ion  
battery is exhausted.  
H
d
xxiii, 26,  
28  
(blinks) (blinks)  
B
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.  
34  
(blinks)  
No lens attached, or  
non-CPU lens attached  
without specifying  
maximum aperture.  
Aperture shown in  
stops from maximum  
aperture.  
Aperture value will be  
displayed if maximum  
aperture is specified.  
F
214  
n
403  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
99  
2 4 Camera unable to focus  
Focus manually.  
(blinks) using autofocus.  
• Use a lower ISO  
sensitivity  
• Use optional ND filter.  
In exposure mode:  
f Increase shutter  
speed  
g Choose a smaller  
aperture (larger  
f-number)  
110  
374  
122  
123  
Subject too bright;  
photo will be  
overexposed.  
q
• Use a higher ISO  
sensitivity  
• Use optional flash. In  
exposure mode:  
f Lower shutter  
speed  
g Choose a larger  
aperture (smaller  
f-number)  
110  
187  
122  
123  
Subject too dark; photo  
will be underexposed.  
r
Change shutter speed  
or select manual  
exposure mode.  
Live view is not  
available while  
multiple exposures are  
being shot.  
A
(blinks)  
A selected in  
exposure mode f.  
122, 125  
207  
a button pressed  
before multiple  
exposure is complete.  
1
(blinks)  
k
(blinks)  
Optional flash unit that  
does not support i-TTL  
(blinks) flash control attached  
Change flash mode  
setting on optional  
flash unit.  
c
189  
(blinks)  
and set to TTL.  
n
404  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Check photo in  
monitor; if  
underexposed, adjust  
settings and try again.  
If indicator blinks for 3s  
after flash fires, photo  
may be underexposed.  
c
190  
(blinks)  
Flash unit that does not  
support red-eye  
reduction attached and  
flash sync mode set to  
red-eye reduction.  
Change flash sync  
mode or use flash unit  
that supports red-eye  
reduction.  
Y
188  
(blinks)  
• Reduce quality or  
size.  
• Delete photographs  
after copying  
important images to  
computer or other  
device.  
83, 86  
240  
Memory insufficient to  
record further photos  
at current settings, or  
camera has run out of  
file or folder numbers.  
n
j
(blinks) (blinks)  
• Insert new memory  
card.  
Release shutter. If error  
persists or appears  
36  
O
(blinks)  
Camera malfunction. frequently, consult  
Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
n
405  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
0
Camera cannot  
Turn camera off and  
No memory card. S detect memory confirm that card is  
card. correctly inserted.  
• Error accessing • Use Nikon-  
memory card. approved card.  
36  
419  
• Check that contacts  
are clean. If card is  
damaged, contact  
retailer or Nikon  
This memory  
card cannot be  
used.  
Card may be  
damaged.  
Insert  
representative.  
(blinks)  
• Unable to create • Delete files or insert 36, 240  
new folder.  
new memory card  
after copying  
another card.  
important images  
to computer or  
other device.  
Memory card has  
This card is not  
formatted.  
Format the card.  
Format memory card  
or insert new memory 36, 39  
card.  
[C] not been  
(blinks) formatted for use  
in camera.  
Failed to update  
flash unit  
firmware.  
Flash cannot be  
used.  
Contact a Nikon-  
authorized  
service  
Firmware for flash  
unit mounted on  
camera was not  
updated correctly.  
Contact a Nikon-  
authorized service  
representative.  
representative.  
Select folder  
containing images  
No images on  
Folder contains  
no images.  
memory card or in from Playback folder  
folder(s) selected menu or insert  
36, 275  
for playback.  
memory card  
containing images.  
n
406  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
0
No images can be  
played back until  
another folder has  
All photos in  
All images are  
hidden.  
current folder are been selected or Hide 275  
hidden.  
image used to allow  
at least one image to  
be displayed.  
File has been  
created or  
modified using a  
computer or  
different make of  
camera, or file is  
corrupt.  
File does not  
contain image  
data.  
File can not be played  
back on camera.  
Selected image Images created with  
Cannot select  
this file.  
can not be  
retouched.  
other devices can not 342  
be retouched.  
Check printer. To  
resume, select  
Continue (if  
Check printer.  
Printer error.  
259 *  
available).  
Paper in printer is Insert paperof correct  
Check paper.  
Paper jam.  
not of selected  
size.  
size and select  
Continue.  
259 *  
259 *  
259 *  
Paper is jammed Clear jam and select  
in printer.  
Continue.  
Insert paper of  
selected size and  
select Continue.  
Check ink. To resume,  
select Continue.  
Replace ink and select  
Continue.  
Printer is out of  
paper.  
Out of paper.  
Check ink supply.  
Out of ink.  
Ink error.  
259 *  
259 *  
Printer is out of  
ink.  
* See printer manual for more information.  
n
407  
Specifications  
Nikon D3S Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Lens mount  
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
12.1 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
36.0 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format)  
12.87 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data  
(requires optional Capture NX 2 software)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
• FX (36×24) image area  
4,256 × 2,832 (L) 3,184 × 2,120 (M) 2,128 × 1,416 (S)  
• 1.2× (30×20) image area  
3,552 × 2,368 (L) 2,656 × 1,776 (M) 1,776 × 1,184 (S)  
• DX (24×16) image area  
2,784 × 1,848 (L) 2,080 × 1,384 (M) 1,392 × 920 (S)  
• 5 : 4 (30×24) image area  
3,552 × 2,832 (L) 2,656 × 2,120 (M) 1,776 × 1,416 (S)  
File format  
NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,  
compressed, or uncompressed  
• TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),  
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)  
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality  
compression available  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both  
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats  
n
408  
Storage  
Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid,  
Monochrome; selected Picture Control can be  
modified; storage for custom Picture Controls  
Media  
Type I CompactFlash memory cards (UDMA compliant)  
Double slot  
Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for  
separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images;  
pictures can be copied between cards.  
File system  
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF  
(Digital Print Order Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable  
Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras), PictBridge  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder  
Frame coverage  
FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical  
1.2× (30×20): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical  
DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical  
5:4 (30×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical  
Magnification  
Eyepoint  
Approx. 0.7 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1  
)
18 mm (–1.0 m–1  
–3–+1 m–1  
)
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VI screen  
with AF area brackets  
Reflex mirror  
Quick return  
Depth-of-field preview When Pv button is pressed, lens aperture is stopped  
down to value selected by user (g and h modes) or by  
camera (e and f modes)  
Lens aperture  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
n
409  
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
DX AF NIKKOR: All functions supported  
Type G or D AF NIKKOR: All functions supported (PC  
Micro-NIKKOR does not support some functions). IX  
NIKKOR lenses not supported.  
Other AF NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color  
matrix metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.  
AI-P NIKKOR: All functions supported except 3D color  
matrix metering II  
Non-CPU: Can be used in exposure modes g and h;  
color matrix metering and aperture value display  
supported if user provides lens data (AI lenses only)  
Electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum  
aperture is f/5.6 or faster.  
Shutter  
Type  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane  
shutter  
Speed  
1/8000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, X250  
Flash sync speed  
X=1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/250 s or slower  
Release  
Release mode  
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),  
CH (continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-release),  
E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)  
Approximate frame  
advance rate  
• DX (24×16): Up to 9 fps (CL) or 9–11 fps (CH)  
• Other image areas: Up to 9 fps  
Self-timer  
Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration  
n
410  
Exposure  
Metering  
TTL exposure metering using 1,005-pixel RGB sensor  
Metering method  
Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D  
lenses); color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses);  
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses  
if user provides lens data  
Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle  
in center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed  
to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on  
average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm  
circle or average of entire frame)  
Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)  
centered on selected focus point (on center focus  
point when non-CPU lens is used)  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV  
Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI  
Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutter-  
priority auto (f); aperture-priority auto (g); manual (h)  
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV  
Exposure bracketing  
Flash bracketing  
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV  
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV  
White balance  
bracketing  
2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3  
ADL bracketing  
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3–5  
frames using preset values for all frames  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L  
button  
ISO sensitivity  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
ISO 200 – 12800 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be  
set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent)  
below ISO 200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 2, or 3 EV  
(ISO 102400 equivalent) above ISO 12800; auto ISO  
sensitivity control available  
Active D-Lighting  
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal,  
Low, or Off  
n
411  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor module  
with TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, and 51 focus  
points (including 15 cross-type sensors)  
Detection range  
Lens servo  
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF  
(C); predictive focus tracking automatically activated  
according to subject status  
Manual (MF): Electronic range finding supported  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Focus lock  
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points  
Single-point AF, dynamic-area AF, auto-area AF  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button  
halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L  
button  
Flash  
Flash control  
TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash  
for digital SLR using 1,005-pixel RGB sensor are  
available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400  
Auto aperture: Available with SB-900 or SB-800 and CPU  
lens  
Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-28, SB-27, and SB-22S  
Distance-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800  
Flash mode  
Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye  
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync  
Flash-ready indicator  
Lights when optional flash unit such as SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is fully  
charged; blinks after flash is fired at full output  
Accessory shoe  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and  
safety lock  
n
412  
Flash  
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-900,  
System (CLS)  
SB-800, or SU-800 as commander and SB-900, SB-800,  
SB-600, or SB-R200 as remotes; Auto FP High-Speed  
Sync and modeling illumination supported with all  
CLS-compatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color  
Information Communication and FV lock supported  
with all CLS-compatible flash units  
Sync terminal  
ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight,  
flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 5 values can  
be stored), choose color temperature (2500 K–10000 K),  
all with fine tuning.  
Live view  
Modes  
Tripod, hand-held  
Autofocus  
Tripod: Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame  
Hand-held: Phase-detection TTL AF with 51 focus  
points (including 15 cross-type sensors)  
Flicker reduction  
50 Hz and 60 Hz  
Movie  
Frame size (pixels)  
• 1,280 × 720/24 fps  
• 320 × 216/24 fps  
• 640 × 424/24 fps  
File format  
Compression  
Audio  
AVI  
Motion-JPEG  
Microphone sensitivity can be adjusted  
ISO sensitivity  
ISO 200–12800 (ISO 6400–Hi 3 in high-sensitivity  
movie mode)  
n
413  
Monitor  
Monitor  
3-in., 921k-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT  
LCD with 170 ° viewing angle, 100% frame coverage,  
and brightness adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images) playback  
with playback zoom, movie playback, slide show,  
highlights, histogram display, auto image rotation,  
image comment (up to 36 characters), and voice  
memo input and playback  
Interface  
USB  
Hi-Speed USB  
Video output  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL; images can be  
displayed on external device while camera monitor is on  
HDMI output  
Audio input  
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector; camera monitor  
turns off when HDMI cable is connected  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)  
Ten-pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control, GP-1  
GPS unit, or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183  
version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS  
adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9-pin connector)  
Supported languages  
Supported languages  
Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech, Danish,  
Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Indonesian,  
Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian, Polish,  
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish  
Power source  
Battery  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL4a battery  
EH-6 AC adapter (available separately)  
AC adapter  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)  
n
414  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 159.5 × 157 × 87.5 mm (6.3 × 6.2 × 3.4 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 1,240 g (2 lb. 12 oz.) without battery, memory  
card, body cap, or accessory shoe cover  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Humidity  
Less than 85% (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged  
battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and  
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.  
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes  
that this manual may contain.  
MH-22 quick charger  
Rated input  
AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)  
Rated output  
DC 12.6 V/1,200 mA  
Supported batteries  
Nikon EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries  
Charging time per  
battery  
Approx. 2 hours and 25 minutes (EN-EL4a) or 1 hour  
and 40 minutes (EN-EL4) when battery is fully  
discharged  
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 160 × 85 × 50.5 mm (6.3 × 3.3 × 2.0 in.)  
Length of cord  
Weight  
Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)  
Approx. 260 g (9.1 oz.), excluding power cable  
EN-EL4a rechargeable Li-ion battery  
Type  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
11.1 V/2,500 mAh  
Rated capacity  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 56.5 × 27 × 82.5 mm (2.2 × 1.1 × 3.2 in.)  
Weight Approx. 180 g (6.3 oz.), excluding terminal cover  
n
415  
A Supported Standards  
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a  
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure  
compatibility among different makes of camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard  
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the  
memory card.  
Exif version 2.21: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File  
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which  
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color  
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital  
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output  
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.  
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for  
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices  
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-  
compliant devices via a single cable connection.  
n
416  
Calibrating Batteries  
The MH-22 quick charger is equipped with a battery calibration  
feature. Calibrate the battery as required to ensure the accuracy of  
the camera and charger battery level displays.  
If the calibration lamp for the current  
Chamber  
lamps (green)  
battery chamber blinks when a  
battery is inserted, the battery needs  
to be calibrated. To begin  
calibration, press the calibration  
button for the current chamber for  
about a second. The time needed to  
calibrate the battery is shown by the  
charge and calibration lamps:  
Charge lamps  
(green)  
Calibration  
lamps (yellow)  
Calibration  
buttons  
Charge lamps  
4 h  
K (glows)  
K (glows)  
K (off)  
Approximate time needed Calibration  
to recalibrate battery  
Over 6 hours  
4 – 6 hours  
lamp  
2 h  
6 h  
K (glows)  
K (glows)  
K (glows)  
K (glows)  
K (glows)  
K (glows)  
K (glows)  
K (off)  
K (glows)  
K (off)  
K (off)  
K (off)  
2 – 4 hours  
Under 2 hours  
K (off)  
When calibration is complete, the calibration and charge lamps will  
turn off and charging will begin immediately.  
Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement  
of battery charge state, calibration need not be performed when  
the calibration lamp blinks. Once begun, calibration can be  
interrupted as desired.  
• If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp  
is blinking, normal charging will begin after about ten seconds.  
• To interrupt calibration, press the calibration button again.  
Calibration will end and charging will begin.  
n
417  
A Battery Warning  
If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when  
no battery is inserted, there is a problem with the charger. If the  
chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a  
battery is inserted, a problem has occurred with the battery or charger  
during charging. Remove the battery, unplug the charger, and take the  
battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative for  
inspection.  
A Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries  
The MH-22 charges only one battery at a time. If batteries are inserted in  
both chambers, they will be charged in the order inserted. If the  
calibration button for the first battery is pressed, the second battery can  
not be calibrated or charged until calibration and charging of the first  
battery are complete.  
n
418  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following Type I CompactFlash memory cards have been  
tested and approved for use in the D3S. Type II cards and  
microdrives can not be used.  
Extreme IV  
Extreme III  
Ultra II  
Standard  
Professional UDMA 300 ×  
SDCFX4 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
SDCFX3 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
SanDisk  
SDCFH  
SDCFB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB  
1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
4 GB  
233 ×  
133 ×  
80 ×  
60 ×  
Professional  
Lexar  
Media  
Platinum II  
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above  
cards, please contact the manufacturer.  
n
419  
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures  
that can be stored on a 4 GB SanDisk Extreme IV (SDCFX4) card at  
different image quality, image size, and image area settings.  
FX (36×24) Image Area *  
Image quality  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 14-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Image size  
File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2  
11.3 MB  
14.3 MB  
10.1 MB  
12.6 MB  
202  
155  
277  
229  
42  
36  
43  
36  
Compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Compressed, 14-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Uncompressed,  
12-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Uncompressed,  
14-bit  
19.1 MB  
24.9 MB  
202  
155  
38  
35  
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
36.1 MB  
20.3 MB  
9.1 MB  
5.9 MB  
3.3 MB  
1.5 MB  
2.9 MB  
1.7 MB  
0.8 MB  
1.5 MB  
0.9 MB  
0.4 MB  
107  
191  
423  
559  
995  
2.1 K  
1.0 K  
1.9 K  
4.1 K  
2.1 K  
3.6 K  
7.8 K  
36  
42  
59  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine 3  
82  
130  
130  
122  
130  
130  
124  
130  
130  
JPEG normal 3  
JPEG basic 3  
* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX  
crop.  
n
420  
DX (24×16) Image Area *  
Image quality  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW), Lossless  
compressed, 14-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Image size  
File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2  
5.2 MB  
6.4 MB  
4.5 MB  
5.6 MB  
460  
356  
626  
522  
62  
54  
78  
59  
Compressed, 12-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Compressed, 14-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Uncompressed,  
12-bit  
NEF (RAW),  
Uncompressed,  
14-bit  
8.3 MB  
460  
356  
58  
52  
10.8 MB  
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
15.5 MB  
8.7 MB  
4.0 MB  
2.5 MB  
1.4 MB  
0.7 MB  
1.3 MB  
0.7 MB  
0.4 MB  
0.7 MB  
0.4 MB  
0.2 MB  
249  
441  
964  
46  
57  
95  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG fine 3  
1.2 K  
2.2 K  
4.8 K  
2.5 K  
4.1 K  
8.9 K  
4.8 K  
7.8 K  
15.6 K  
130  
130  
130  
130  
130  
130  
130  
130  
130  
JPEG normal 3  
JPEG basic 3  
* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.  
n
421  
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.  
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 200.  
Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression, ISO sensitivity is set  
to Hi 0.3 or higher, High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or  
ISO sensitivity is over ISO 3200, or long exposure noise reduction, Active  
D-Lighting, or image authentication is on.  
3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal  
quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer  
capacity drop accordingly.  
A d3—Max. Continuous Release (0307)  
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single  
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 130.  
n
422  
Battery Life  
The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged  
EN-EL4a battery (2,500 mAh) varies with the condition of the  
battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. Sample figures  
are given below.  
CIPA standard: Approximately 4,200 shots. Measured at 23 °C/  
73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity  
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings  
once every 30 s. Live view not used.  
Nikon standard: Approximately 4,700 shots. Measured at 20 °C/  
68 °F with an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED lens under the  
following test conditions: vibration reduction off, image quality  
set to JPEG normal, image size set to L (large), shutter speed  
1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed halfway for three  
seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three  
times; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned  
on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once  
exposure meters have turned off.  
n
423  
The following can reduce battery life:  
• Using the monitor  
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
• Repeated autofocus operations  
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs  
• Slow shutter speeds  
• Using the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter  
• Using the optional GP-1 GPS unit  
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4a  
batteries:  
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce  
battery performance.  
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their  
charge if left unused.  
• Check the condition of the battery regularly using the Battery  
info option in the setup menu (0333). If j is displayed for  
Calibration, calibrate the battery using the MH-22 quick charger  
(if the battery has not been used for more than six months,  
recharge the battery when calibration is complete).  
n
424  
Index  
Symbols  
Active folder .......................................... 288  
Add items (My Menu)......................... 359  
ADL bracketing........................... 145, 312  
Adobe RGB............................................. 183  
AE & flash (Auto bracketing set).... 136,  
312  
AE only (Auto bracketing set) 136, 312  
AE-L............................................ 97, 132, 321  
AF......................... 90, 92, 94, 98, 295–301  
AF activation.......................................... 298  
AF area brackets....................... 12, 41, 62  
AF assist................................................... 191  
AF fine tune............................................ 339  
AF point selection................................ 300  
AF-area mode.......................................... 92  
AF-C priority selection ....................... 295  
B button .................................... 91, 300  
B button for vertical shooting... 91,  
301  
AF-S priority selection........................ 296  
After delete ............................................ 281  
Amber ............................................ 154, 348  
Aperture.............................. 123–126, 131  
Aperture Lock........................................ 131  
Aperture-priority auto ....................... 123  
Approved memory cards.................. 419  
Aspect ratio............................................ 347  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button................... 321  
Assign BKT button............................... 322  
Assign Fn button.................................. 316  
Assign preview button....................... 321  
Attaching the lens ................................. 31  
Audio..................................... 252, 282, 283  
Audio output......................................... 252  
Audio/video cable............................ i, 269  
Auto (White balance) ......................... 150  
Auto bracketing ................ 136, 312, 313  
Auto bracketing (Mode M)............... 313  
Auto bracketing set............................. 312  
Auto DX crop .................................... 78, 81  
Auto FP high-speed sync. ................. 311  
K (Single-point AF) ....................... 92, 93  
I (Dynamic-area AF).......... 92, 93, 296  
H (Auto-area AF) ............................ 92, 93  
S .......................................... 90, 96, 102, 296  
C .......................................... 90, 97, 295, 296  
M ..................................................... 60, 90, 99  
CL............................................. 102, 104, 307  
CH ............................................ 102, 104, 307  
J ............................................................... 102  
E (Self-timer)............................... 102, 106  
MUP ................................................... 102, 108  
a (Matrix).............................................. 116  
Z (Center-weighted)................ 116, 304  
b (Spot)................................................. 116  
e (Programmed auto)........................ 120  
f (Shutter-priority auto) ................... 122  
g (Aperture-priority auto)................ 123  
h (Manual).............................................. 125  
Q (Help)............................................... 22, 25  
t (Memory buffer)....................... 49, 105  
L (Preset manual) .................. 150, 158  
R (Info) button................................ 14, 17  
a (Live view) button..................... 54, 66  
D switch.......................................... 10, 310  
Numerics  
1,005-pixel RGB sensor...................... 192  
1.2× (30 × 20)........................................... 79  
12-bit .......................................................... 85  
14-bit .......................................................... 85  
3D color matrix metering II..... 116, 117  
3D-tracking ............................. 92, 93, 297  
5 : 4 (30 × 24)............................................ 79  
51 points (3D-tracking)..................... 297  
A
A/V cable............................................. i, 269  
AC adapter............................................. 372  
Accessories ............................................ 372  
Active D-Lighting....................... 145, 181  
425  
Auto image rotation........................... 332  
Auto meter off............................... 45, 305  
Auto meter-off delay.......................... 305  
Auto-area AF ..................................... 92, 93  
Autofocus......... 90, 92, 94, 98, 295–301  
Connector for external microphone. 4,  
71  
Continuous high speed .. 102, 104, 307  
Continuous low speed.... 102, 104, 307  
Continuous release mode....... 102, 104  
Continuous-servo AF.. 90, 97, 295, 296  
Contrast-detect autofocus ... 54, 56, 58  
Control panel...................................... 8–11  
Copy image(s) ....................................... 278  
Copyright...................................... 232, 335  
Copyright information ....................... 335  
CPU contacts ......................................... 368  
CPU lens ........................................... 32, 366  
Creative Lighting System ........ 186, 187  
Cropping (PictBridge [Setup] menu) ....  
262  
B
Backlight.......................................... 10, 310  
Backup (Slot 2)......................................... 88  
Battery......................... 26, 28–30, 43, 333  
Battery info............................................ 333  
Beep ......................................................... 306  
D button....... 137, 141, 145, 204, 322  
Black-and-white (Monochrome).... 347  
Body cap...................................... 4, 31, 375  
Border............................................. 261, 265  
Bracketing........................... 136, 312, 313  
Bracketing order.................................. 313  
Bulb ................................................. 126, 128  
Burst................................................ 307, 317  
Custom setting bank .......................... 294  
Custom Settings................................... 292  
Customize command dials............... 322  
Cyanotype (Monochrome) ............... 347  
C
D
Calibrating ................................... 417–418  
Camera Control Pro 2................ 257, 375  
Capture NX 2......................... 84, 327, 375  
Center-weighted ........................ 116, 304  
Center-weighted area........................ 304  
Center-weighted metering..... 116, 304  
Charging the battery .................... 26–27  
Choose color temp. (White balance).....  
150, 157  
Choose image area......................... 79, 81  
Clean image sensor ............................ 378  
Clock ................................................. 34, 330  
Clock battery.................................. 35, 386  
Cloudy (White balance) .................... 150  
CLS............................................................ 187  
Color balance........................................ 348  
Color space............................................ 183  
Color temperature ........... 150, 152, 157  
CompactFlash................................ 36, 419  
Compatible lenses .............................. 366  
Compressed (Type)................................ 85  
Computer............................................... 254  
Date and time................................. 34, 330  
Date format..................................... 35, 330  
Daylight saving time.................... 34, 330  
DCF version 2.0........................... 184, 416  
Default settings ....... 200, 287, 294, 392  
Delete................................................ 52, 240  
Delete all images.................................. 242  
Delete current image................... 52, 240  
Depth-of-field ....................................... 119  
Depth-of-field preview button ...... 119,  
312, 321  
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 258,  
263, 267, 416  
Diopter..................................................... 373  
Direct sunlight (White balance)...... 150  
Display mode ........................................ 277  
D-Lighting .............................................. 344  
DPOF............................ 258, 263, 267, 416  
Dust off ref photo ................................ 327  
DX (24 × 16).............................................. 79  
Dynamic AF area .................................. 296  
Dynamic-area AF.................... 92, 93, 296  
426  
E
Focal length ....................... 214, 370–371  
Focal plane mark.................................. 100  
Focus ....................... 89, 90, 92, 94, 96, 99  
Focus indicator .............................. 49, 100  
Focus lock................................................. 96  
Focus mode ............................................. 90  
Focus mode switch ............................... 32  
Focus point ............. 56, 92, 94, 296, 300  
Focus point wrap-around ................. 299  
Focus tracking...................... 91, 297, 298  
Focus tracking with lock-on............. 298  
Focusing screen................. 373, 384, 409  
Format .............................................. 39, 326  
Format memory card.......................... 326  
Frame interval (Slide show).............. 282  
Front-curtain sync ............................... 193  
Full-frame playback............................. 222  
FV lock...................................................... 196  
FX (36 × 24) .............................................. 79  
Easy exposure compensation......... 303  
Electronic rangefinder....................... 100  
Ethernet......................................... 257, 372  
EV steps for exposure cntrl. ............. 302  
Exif version 2.21.......................... 184, 416  
Exposure............ 115, 116, 118, 132, 134  
Exposure bracketing....... 136, 312, 313  
Exposure compensation................... 134  
Exposure delay mode........................ 310  
Exposure indicator.............................. 127  
Exposure lock ....................................... 132  
Exposure meters.................. 45, 116, 305  
Exposure mode.................................... 118  
Exposure program .............................. 397  
Extended menu banks ...................... 287  
External microphone ............................ 71  
F
G
File information ................................... 226  
File naming............................................ 290  
File number sequence....................... 308  
Filter effects........................................... 348  
Filter effects (Set Picture Control). 173,  
174  
GPS.................................................. 217, 233  
GPS data.................................................. 233  
GPS unit................................................... 217  
H
Fine tune optimal exposure ............ 304  
Firmware version................................. 340  
Flash............................. 186, 187, 193, 196  
Flash (White balance) ........................ 150  
Flash bracketing ............... 136, 312, 313  
Flash control.......................................... 192  
Flash mode............................................ 193  
Flash only (Auto bracketing set)... 136,  
312  
Flash range ............................................ 195  
Flash ready indicator 13, 190, 197, 412  
Flash shutter speed ............................ 312  
Flash sync speed.................................. 311  
Flash sync terminal............................. 186  
Flexible program ................................. 121  
Flicker reduction.................... 54, 68, 330  
Fluorescent (White balance) ........... 150  
Fn button ................................ 82, 197, 316  
f-number ............................. 123, 124, 368  
Hand-held................................................. 59  
HDMI ..................................... 271, 329, 416  
HDMI mini-pin connector...................... 4  
Help ..................................................... 22, 25  
Hi................................................................ 111  
Hide image............................................. 275  
High definition................... 271, 329, 416  
High ISO NR ........................................... 291  
Highlights............................................... 227  
High-sensitivity movie mode ............ 72  
Histogram..................................... 228, 229  
I
Image area........................... 32, 78, 81, 86  
Image authentication......................... 334  
Image comment................................... 331  
Image Dust Off ref photo.................. 327  
Image file................................................ 416  
Image overlay........................................ 349  
427  
Image quality........................................... 83  
Image review ............................... 224, 281  
Image size ................................................. 86  
Incandescent (White balance)........ 150  
Index print ............................................. 266  
In-focus indicator ............................ 49, 90  
Information .................................. 225, 277  
Information display ..................... 14, 309  
Interval timer shooting ..................... 208  
ISO sensitivity .................... 109, 110, 112  
ISO sensitivity auto control.............. 112  
ISO sensitivity step value.................. 302  
i-TTL.......................................................... 192  
i-TTL balanced-fill flash for digital SLR..  
192  
Magenta........................................ 154, 348  
Manage Picture Control..................... 176  
Manual (Exposure mode).................. 125  
Manual (Focus mode)............. 60, 90, 99  
Manual focus ............................. 60, 90, 99  
Matrix ....................................................... 116  
Matrix metering.................................... 117  
Max. continuous release.................... 307  
Maximum aperture ................... 100, 214  
Maximum sensitivity........................... 113  
Memory buffer..................... 49, 102, 105  
Memory card ................. 36, 39, 326, 419  
Memory card capacity ....................... 420  
Memory card slot................................... 37  
Metering.................................................. 116  
Metering selector.......................... 48, 117  
Microphone ................................ 4, 5, 6, 71  
Minimum aperture....................... 32, 118  
Minimum shutter speed.................... 113  
Mired ........................................................ 155  
Mirror....................................... 55, 108, 381  
Mirror up ................................................. 108  
Mirror up mode .......................... 102, 108  
Modeling flash ............................ 119, 312  
Monitor..................... 14, 51, 54, 222, 326  
Monitor off delay ................................. 306  
Monochrome......................................... 347  
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) 170  
Mounting index.................................. 5, 31  
Movie settings......................................... 70  
Movies........................................................ 66  
Multi selector.................................. 23, 315  
Multiple exposure................................ 202  
My Menu................................................. 359  
J
JPEG...................................................... 83, 88  
JPEG basic ................................................. 83  
JPEG compression.................................. 85  
JPEG fine.................................................... 83  
JPEG normal............................................. 83  
L
L (large)....................................................... 86  
LAN........................................................... 372  
Language ........................................ 33, 331  
LCD ........................................... 10, 310, 326  
LCD brightness..................................... 326  
LCD illumination.................................. 310  
Lens ......................... 31–32, 214, 339, 366  
Lens cap..................................................... 31  
Lens distance information ............... 192  
Lens focus ring ................................. 31, 99  
Lens mount.......................................... 5, 32  
Lens mounting index............................ 31  
Live view.............................. 53–63, 66–69  
Live view mode................................ 55, 59  
Lo............................................................... 111  
Lock mirror up for cleaning ............. 381  
Long exp. NR......................................... 291  
Lossless compressed (Type) ............... 85  
N
NEF ................................................ 83, 84, 85  
NEF (RAW)................................... 83, 84, 85  
NEF (RAW) bit depth............................. 85  
NEF (RAW) processing........................ 353  
NEF (RAW) recording ............................ 85  
Neutral (Set Picture Control)............ 170  
Nikon Transfer....................................... 254  
No memory card? ................................ 324  
M
M (medium)............................................... 86  
428  
No. of copies (PictBridge [Setup] menu)  
261  
Non-CPU lens ....................................... 214  
Non-CPU lens data..................... 214, 215  
RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Slot 2) ....... 88  
Rear control panel .......................... 10–11  
Rear-curtain sync................................. 193  
Recent settings..................................... 363  
Rechargeable Li-ion battery ........... i, 26  
Red-eye correction.............................. 345  
Red-eye reduction............................... 193  
Release button to use dial................ 324  
Release mode........................................ 101  
Release mode dial ............................... 103  
Release mode dial lock release....... 103  
Remote cord ......................... 58, 128, 376  
Remove items (My Menu)................. 361  
Removing the lens from the camera 32  
Reset...................................... 200, 287, 294  
Reset custom settings........................ 294  
Reset shooting menu......................... 287  
Resize ....................................................... 355  
Restoring default settings ..... 200, 287,  
294, 392  
O
Optimal quality (JPEG compression) 85  
Overflow (Slot 2)..................................... 88  
Overview data...................................... 234  
P
Page size........................................ 261, 265  
Phase-detection autofocus ................ 54  
Photo info ..................................... 225, 277  
Photo info/playback........................... 315  
PictBridge...................................... 258, 416  
Picture angle......................... 78, 370–371  
Picture Controls ................................... 170  
Playback .......................................... 51, 221  
Playback folder..................................... 275  
Playback information................ 225, 277  
Playback menu..................................... 274  
Playback zoom..................................... 237  
Predictive focus tracking.............. 90, 91  
Preset manual (White balance)..... 150,  
158  
Press the shutter-release button all the  
way down................................................ 50  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway............................. 49, 50, 96, 132  
Print (DPOF)........................................... 263  
Print options (PictBridge [Setup] menu)  
261  
Retouch menu ...................................... 341  
Reverse indicators ............................... 324  
RGB........................................... 83, 183, 228  
RGB Histogram ..................................... 228  
Rotate tall ............................................... 282  
S
S (small)...................................................... 86  
Save/load settings............................... 336  
Saving camera settings...................... 336  
Screen tips.............................................. 310  
Self-timer ............................. 102, 106, 305  
Sensitivity ............................ 109, 110, 112  
Sepia (Monochrome).......................... 347  
Set Picture Control .............................. 170  
Setup menu ........................................... 325  
Shade (White balance)....................... 150  
Shooting data .................... 230, 231, 232  
Shooting menu..................................... 284  
Shooting menu bank.......................... 285  
Shutter speed........... 122, 125–126, 130  
Shutter speed lock .............................. 130  
Shutter-priority auto........................... 122  
Print select............................................. 263  
Print set (DPOF).................................... 267  
Printing ................................................... 258  
Programmed auto............................... 120  
Protecting photographs................... 238  
Pv button ...................... 67, 119, 312, 321  
Q
Quality (Movie settings)....................... 70  
R
Rank items (My Menu)....................... 362  
429  
Shutter-release button 49, 50, 96, 132,  
305  
U
Uncompressed (Type).......................... 85  
USB.................................................. 255, 259  
USB cable................................... i, 255, 259  
Use GPS to set camera clock............ 220  
UTC........................................... 34, 219, 233  
Shutter-release button AE-L............ 305  
Side-by-side comparison.................. 357  
Single-frame.......................................... 102  
Single-point AF ................................ 92, 93  
Single-servo AF...................... 90, 96, 296  
Size ....................................................... 70, 86  
Size priority (JPEG compression)...... 85  
Skylight ................................................... 348  
Slide show.............................................. 282  
Slot............................................................... 36  
Slot 1.................................................... 37, 39  
Slot 2.................................................... 37, 88  
Slot selection ........................................ 224  
Slow sync................................................ 193  
Speaker ............................................ 73, 251  
Speedlights............................................ 186  
Spot.......................................................... 116  
Spot metering ...................................... 116  
sRGB ......................................................... 183  
Standard (Set Picture Control)........ 170  
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR 192  
Start printing................................ 262, 265  
V
Vertical shutter-release button lock 320  
Video mode............................................ 329  
Viewfinder ................................ 12, 41, 409  
Viewfinder eyepiece ................. 106, 210  
Viewfinder focus..................... 41, 42, 373  
ViewNX ............................................. 84, 184  
Vignette Control................................... 290  
Virtual horizon ..................... 62, 318, 338  
Vivid (Set Picture Control)................. 170  
Voice memo....................... 223, 245–252  
Voice memo button............................ 247  
Voice memo overwrite....................... 247  
W
Warm filter.............................................. 348  
WB ................................................... 141, 150  
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)....  
141, 312  
T
Television....................................... 269, 329  
Ten-pin remote terminal.......... 217, 376  
Thumbnail.............................................. 235  
Thumbnail playback........................... 235  
TIFF (RGB).................................................. 83  
Time .................................................. 34, 330  
Time stamp................................... 261, 265  
Time zone........................................ 34, 330  
Time zone and date..................... 34, 330  
Timer............................................... 106, 208  
Toning (Set Picture Control) ... 173, 175  
Top control panel ................................ 8–9  
Trim .......................................................... 346  
Tripod ......................................................... 55  
Two-button reset................................. 200  
Type D lens ............................................ 368  
Type G lens ............................................ 368  
White balance ............................. 141, 150  
White balance bracketing................. 141  
Wireless.......................................... 257, 372  
Wireless network........................ 257, 372  
Wireless transmitter .................. 257, 372  
WT-4................................................ 257, 372  
430  
431  
432  

Pioneer Car Stereo System SPH DA02 User Manual
Pioneer Car Stereo System KP 410A User Manual
Phoenix Gold Car Amplifier RX5001 User Manual
Oster Blender Oster Digital Blender User Manual
Nikon 9350 User Manual
Minolta Camcorder 70EX User Manual
Metra Electronics 95 7866B User Manual
Marshall electronic V R82DP SD User Manual
Lochinvar Copper Fin CB CW 495 745 User Manual
Kenwood DDX7045 User Manual